JP6735018B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a pachinko game machine that uses a game ball as a game medium.

Generally, a pachinko game machine is provided with a main control board that controls a game and a sub-control board that performs a control process based on a command (production control command) from the main control board. Of these, examples of the sub-control board include a payout control board, a performance control board, various display control boards, an illumination control board, an acoustic control board, and the like. Further, in some pachinko game machines, when the firing handle is not operated for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board transmits a command for a customer waiting demonstration (paragraph 0181 of Patent Document 1). In addition, paragraph 0055 of Patent Document 2 describes that the number of players is counted based on the touch signal related to the firing handle and the changing state of the decorative pattern (the state of the effect by the moving image).
Japanese Patent No. 5991760 JP, 2007-244761, A

By the way, in the pachinko game machine, the use of operation detection (also referred to as “touch detection”) related to the firing handle is very limited as disclosed in Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 described above. Has become. This is considered to be because the degree of attention to touch detection is low and few people notice the possibility of touch detection. Game machines such as pachinko machines are required to have a variety of game characteristics and selection, but it is thought that the variety of game machines can be further improved by studying various control modes based on steering wheel operation detection. To be

The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the variety of game machines, and particularly to more effectively utilize the operation detection of the player by the firing handle and the like. It is to provide a pachinko game machine that can.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention shoots a game ball into a game area, and the game ball enters a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the playing area. the trigger is stopped and displayed after as a symbol games varied display the FIG pattern (such as special symbol) in that, a special game that can impart benefits to the player when symbols stopped and displayed is a predetermined display mode It's a pachinko game machine,
Main control means for controlling the progress of a game including the symbol game (such as a main board),
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting the contact of the player,
A rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting the rotation operation of the player,
An environment setting means that enables the player to set an environment for the game ,
Some of the effects (touch effects, etc.) are output in response to touch detection, which is detection of contact of the player by the touch detection means,
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state ("B1: game standby state (normal demo display)" or the like) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is being executed, and the symbol game Has a game in-execution state (“B2: in-game state” or the like), which is a state in which any of the special games is being executed,
In the game standby state, a plurality of types of game standby states in which the output contents of the effect by the sub-control unit are different ("B11: game standby A (normal demo display)" to "B14: game standby (power saving)", etc.) Including
Depending on which one of the plurality of types of game standby states is in the game standby state, whether or not an effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and/or an output which is triggered by the touch detection. Are configured to be different,
As the starting winning opening, a first starting winning opening and a second starting winning opening are provided.
An opening/closing member is attached to the second starting winning opening,
The game area is provided with an operation port into which a game ball can enter,
The opening and closing member is driven by the fact that the game ball has entered the operation opening, so that the game ball can be easily inserted into the second starting winning opening.
In the situation where the power is restored while the touch detection means is being contacted before the power is turned on, the effect triggered by the touch detection is not output,
During the output of the effect triggered by the touch detection, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the effect triggered by the touch detection during output is interrupted, Even if a game ball enters the operating port, the effect triggered by the touch detection during output continues without interruption,
When a predetermined first error (illegal winning error, porcelain detection error, etc.) is detected during the output of the effect triggered by the touch detection, the effect triggered by the touch detection being output is interrupted, Even if a second error different from the first error (a firing direction inappropriate error, a door opening error, etc.) is detected, the effect triggered by the touch detection during output is continued without interruption,
It is possible to set the environment after displaying the environment setting screen for performing the environment setting in the game standby state,
After a predetermined time has passed from the game running state to the game standby state, it is possible to execute the effect triggered by the touch detection, while the environment setting screen is displayed and the environment setting is being performed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that inside, an effect triggered by touch detection is not executed .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine which can improve the variety of gaming machines and can more effectively utilize the operation detection of the firing handle.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of one example of the present invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing a function of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing a main board composition of a Pachinko game machine. (A) is a front view showing a substrate case in which a main substrate is accommodated, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view schematically showing a portion taken along the line AA in (a). It is a block diagram showing a main substrate, a sub-main substrate, and basic functional means of the sub-sub substrate. It is an explanatory view showing a main symbol display board of a main control display device. (A) is an explanatory view showing a display example during change of the effect design in the effect display device, (b) is an explanatory view showing a display example during stop of the effect design. (A) is a chart showing a win/fail judgment table, and (b) is a chart showing a variation pattern table for out-of-sync. (A) is a chart showing a big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery, (b) is a chart showing a big hit symbol determination table for the second lottery, and (c) is a small hit symbol determination table used during a small hit. The chart, (d) is a chart showing a detachment pattern determination table used at the time of detachment. FIG. 6 is a chart showing a variation pattern table used at the time of out-of-range, (b) is a chart showing a variation pattern table used at the time of 15R big hit, and (c) is a chart showing a variation pattern table used at the time of 5R big hit. Is a chart showing a winning value and a payout rate for each set value. (A) is a chart showing a look-ahead determination table, and (b) is a chart showing a look-ahead code correspondence table. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of power activation in a main board. It is a flowchart which shows an initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value change process. It is a flow chart which shows game progress interruption processing in a main board. It is a flowchart showing a lottery determination process on the main board. It is a flow chart which shows power-off processing in a main board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state before steering wheel operation, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of steering wheel operation. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the operation buttons, the cross key, and their periphery are viewed from the front upper side. It is a chart showing a control element concerning touch detection. FIG. 23 is a table showing control elements following FIG. 22. (A) is a chart showing whether the performance is executed according to the state of the gaming machine, and (b) is a chart showing whether the performance is executed following (a). It is a chart showing an effect type for each state of the gaming machine. It is a chart which shows following FIG. 25 about an effect classification. (A) is a chart which shows the production regulation concerning touch detection after the second time, and (b) is a chart which shows the production regulation following (a). It is the timing chart which shows the production output example at the time of setting change. It is the timing chart which shows the production output example at the time of environment setting. It is the timing chart which shows the production output example at the time of reach display. It is the timing chart which shows the production output example at the time of big hit end demonstration display. (A) is a timing chart showing a production output example at the time of power interruption recovery when there is a power interruption during a game standby, (b) Production output example at power interruption recovery when there is a power interruption during symbol fluctuation 3 is a timing chart showing (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of standby screen A, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of standby screen B, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows display screen C (environment setting screen). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a production output at the time of a touch detection at the time of standby screen A, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the production output example at the time of a touch detection during a fluctuation stop. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of the energization return screen in the standby screen A, (b) is an explanatory view showing an example of the energization return screen during the symbol change. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the abnormal display which concerns on a door opening error, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting change screen A, (b) shows an example of the setting change screen at the time of the standby screen B. FIG. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of a normal reach screen, (b) is an explanatory view showing an example of an SP reach screen, and (c) is an explanatory view showing an example of a big hit end demonstration screen. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of a big hit start demonstration screen, (b) is an explanatory view showing an example of a round screen, and (c) is an explanatory view showing an example of a hitting specific effect screen. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of a hitting specific effect screen different from FIG. 38(c), (b) is an explanatory view showing an example of an inter-round effect screen, and (c) is a hit different from (a). It is an explanatory view showing an example of a middle specific effect screen. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode before a touch production, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode at the time of a touch production. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a production output before a touch announcement, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the production output example after a touch announcement. (A) is a diagram showing a selection table of the notice group related to the change before the touch, (b) is a chart showing a selection table of the notice group related to the change of the touch transition, (c) is a look-ahead notice related to the change before the touch Is a diagram showing a selection table of (1), and (d) is a diagram showing a selection table of a pre-reading notice relating to a change in touch transition.

Examples of the pachinko game machine according to the present invention will be described below. Here, first, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described, and then the gaming procedure, effect, control mode, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
<Basic configuration of Pachinko machine>

FIG. 1 shows a front structure of a pachinko game machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 10, a gaming board 50 is mounted on a gaming machine frame 11 described later. Of these, the game board 50 has different constituent elements such as accessory devices and designs according to the model of the pachinko game machine 10. Further, the game board 50 can be separated from the game machine frame 11 by releasing the electrical connection relationship and the structural connection relationship with the game machine frame 11.

In addition, by sharing the structural and electrical connection relationships with the gaming machine frame 11 for a plurality of types of gaming boards 50, it is possible to change the model so that the gaming machine frame 11 is shared between different models. There is. In the following, first, the gaming machine frame 11 will be described, and then the board surface configuration of the gaming board 50 will be described.

The gaming machine frame 11 has an outer frame 12, a front frame (also called “inner frame” or “main body frame”) 13, and a lower front plate (also called “curtain plate”) 14. .. Further, a glass door 15 and a dish unit 16 are attached to the front frame 13. Out of these, the outer frame 12 is a rectangular frame body used for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 10 to a predetermined position in an island facility in a game arcade (gaming store), and as shown in FIG. The front frame 13 having the door 15 and the dish unit 16 and the lower front plate 14 described above have an opening portion whose front side is closed.

In addition, nailing is generally performed as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island facility. Then, wood is used as a material of at least a portion of the outer frame 12 for fixing to the island equipment. It should be noted that instead of wood, it is possible to employ, for example, a nailable plastic material. It is also possible to adopt a construction method other than nailing as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island facility.

The front frame 13 has a structure having an outer shape that matches the opening of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 via hinge mechanisms 15A and 15B shown on the left side in FIG. Then, the front frame 13 is opened from the closed state with respect to the outer frame 12 by swinging forward with the left edge in FIG. 1 as the fixed end and the right edge as the free end. Further, the front frame 13 swings rearward from the open state, enters the outer frame 12 and is locked, and is brought into the closed state again. When the front frame 13 is closed, it closes the part between the upper short part of the outer frame 12 and the lower front plate 14.

The locking of the front frame 13 to the outer frame 12 and the release from the outer frame 12 are performed via a locking device (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, a cylinder portion 17 of the locking device is arranged at a lower portion on the free end side of the front frame 13, and the cylinder portion 17 covers the lower portion of the front frame 13. Through the dish unit 16 described above, the keyhole is directed toward the front of the pachinko game machine 10. Then, when the game hall clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns the key counterclockwise, for example, the free end side of the front frame 13 is released from the locking device, and the front frame 13 is opened. Become.

In contrast to such a front frame 13, the lower front plate 14 does not have a structure for opening and closing like the front frame 13, and is fixed to the outer frame 12 so as not to move. The lower front plate 14 always closes the lower end of the front surface of the outer frame 12.

The glass door 15 arranged in the front part of the front frame 13 and the dish unit 16 are attached to the front frame 13 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). Further, both the glass door 15 and the dish unit 16 can be independently swung with the left edge in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge as a free end. Then, the glass door 15 and the dish unit 16 are brought into an open state by, for example, a game hall clerk horizontally swinging forward, and are swinged horizontally rearward from the open state to be locked to the front frame 13. This results in a closed state.

The locking of the glass door 15 to the front frame 13 and the release from the front frame 13 are performed via the above-described locking device (not shown). That is, when the amusement hall store clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the above-mentioned cylinder 17 and rotates this key, for example, in the clockwise direction opposite to the time when the front frame 13 is opened, the free end side of the glass door 15 is the lock device. And the glass door 15 is opened. Then, the glass door 15 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap with the front frame 13, and the glass door 15 is pushed in so as to be parallel to the front frame 13, so that the locking device is activated and the glass door 15 is moved to the front side again. Lock on the frame 13.

In addition, by opening the glass door 15, a locking mechanism (not shown) of the dish unit 16 appears and can be operated, and an operating portion (not shown) of this locking mechanism is moved downward by a game hall clerk, for example. By performing the pushing operation, the dish unit 16 is opened. Further, the dish unit 16 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap with the front frame 13, and the dish unit 16 is pushed in so as to be parallel to the front frame 13, whereby the locking mechanism is activated and the dish unit 16 is again moved. Lock on the front frame 13.

Further, the glass door 15 holds, for example, two parallel transparent plates in a detachable manner, and when the glass door 15 is in a closed state, the gaming board 50 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through these transparent plates. I am trying. As the transparent plate, a transparent resin plate or the like can be used in addition to the glass plate. Further, by opening the glass door 15, the front surface of the game board 50 held by the front frame 13 by the game board holding mechanism (not shown) is exposed. Further, although illustration is omitted, the front frame 13 has a game ball passage or the like for guiding or collecting a game ball which is a game medium.

The plate unit 16 has an upper ball plate 18, a lower ball plate 19, a firing handle 20 and the like on the front surface thereof. Of these, the upper ball plate 18, the storage of the game ball, supply of the game ball to the launching device 43 (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 4) operated via the firing handle 20, the game to the lower ball plate 19 Mechanisms are provided for various functions such as ball ejection. Further, the lower ball plate 19 stores the game balls, receives the game balls sent from the upper ball plate 18, and stores the game balls in a ball box (so-called dollar box) placed outside the pachinko gaming machine 10. Mechanisms for various functions such as discharging are provided. In addition, the ball box may be integrally provided in the island facility.

Further, in the present embodiment, various speakers 21 are provided in the upper corner portion of the glass door 15, the lower front plate 14 and the like, and through these speakers 21, depending on the gaming state, the effect pattern and the like. BGM and various sound effects are output.

Furthermore, an operation button 22 that can be operated by the player is provided on a portion of the upper ball plate 18 that faces the player. The operation button 22 is provided on the outer wall surface of the upper portion of the upper bowl plate 18, and is located near the center of the upper bowl plate 18 in the left-right direction. Further, the operation button 22 is internally provided with an operation button light emitter (not shown) so as to output light in accordance with the effect pattern to be executed.

The operation button 22 may be projected upward in a predetermined case by using a drive source such as a motor. Although not shown in detail, the operation button 22 in the present embodiment may be displaced by driving the lifting motor so that the tip of the operation button 22 protrudes upward to form an operation lever input section capable of performing input by tilting. It is possible and has a half-moon shaped eccentric cam for generating vibration in the drive system of the operating lever.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21, in addition to the operation buttons 22, a cross key 96 is provided, and the player can use the cross key 96 to set various environments. The contents of the environment setting can be exemplified by volume adjustment of the speaker 21, brightness adjustment and light amount adjustment of effect display described later, or change of effect mode described later. Further, it is possible to provide a display device capable of performing an effect related to a game and a display related to the above-mentioned environment setting, for example, on the front frame 13 or the like of the gaming machine frame 11.

Further, in addition to the cross key, for example, a lever-shaped operation unit, a touch panel of various types, or the like can be used. Further, reference numeral 97 in FIG. 21 is a ball lending button, and reference numeral 98 is a return button. Further, reference numeral 98 in FIG. 21 is a ball-removing button for the upper bowl plate 18.
<Back view of Pachinko game machine>

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface of the front frame 13, a set base (also called a "back set board") 31 which is provided with a game ball passage for guiding or collecting the game balls and serves as a prize ball path forming mechanism 31 The power supply unit 32 for supplying power to the entire gaming machine and the payout control (also referred to as "prize ball control") board for controlling the gaming machine frame side are attached below the set board 31. Each 103 is attached in a state where it is housed in a dedicated transparent case. Further, on the back side of the game board 50, a main board (main control board) 102 that integrally controls the entire game and a sub-board 104 that executes performance control based on a control command from the main board 102 are dedicated to each. It is housed in a transparent case and provided in a positional relationship corresponding to the opening of the set board 31. Further, the set board 31 also includes a launcher 43 and a launch control board 105 that controls the launcher 43.

In the set base 31, the prize ball tank 33 is provided above the opening. The prize ball tank 33 stores game balls that are supplied from the island facility and serve as prize balls. Furthermore, below the prize ball tank 33, a prize ball passage 34, a payout unit 35, and a prize ball discharge passage 36 are provided. The prize ball passage 34, the payout unit 35, and the prize ball discharge passage 36 are arranged along the right side portion from above the gaming board 50 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. Has been done.

The prize ball passage 34 described above straightens and guides the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 to the downstream side. In addition, the above-mentioned payout unit 35 is in communication with the prize ball passage 34 and can discharge the balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 downward in units of one ball. Further, the prize ball discharge passage 36 guides the game balls flown down from the payout unit 35 to the ball plate (upper ball plate 18 or lower ball plate 19) as prize balls.

The power supply unit 32 described above is provided in the lower left portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the back as shown in FIG. Then, the power supply unit 32 converts AC power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine into various voltages used in the gaming machine, and supplies the voltages to the payout control board 103, the main board 102, the sub board 104, and the like. Further, the power switch 40 for operating the power supply unit 32 is arranged behind other devices as shown by a hidden line (broken line) at the lower right portion of the drawing. The power switch 40 is installed so that it does not turn off even if the dropped game ball is hit directly, so that it is turned on when the lower part of the power switch 40 is pushed below the center and tilted downward.

The above-mentioned payout control board 103 is arranged in the lower right portion of the set board 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the back as shown in FIG. Then, the payout control board 103 has a payout control function of controlling the payout unit 35 in accordance with a command relating to the payout from the main board 102 and a lending request from the outside. Further, the above-mentioned launch control board 105 has a launch control function for controlling the launch device 43 so as to launch a game ball (hit ball) into the game area with a strength according to the operation amount of the launch handle 20 (see FIG. 1). ing.

The above-mentioned main board 102 is arranged in the lower central part on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly like various lottery functions and setting change functions, control functions for the payout control board 103 and the sub-board 104, etc. It has a central processing function in the pachinko game machine 10. The above-described sub-board 104 is arranged in the upper central part on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly has a function for controlling various effects described later.

As for the sub-board 104, a main sub-board (sub-main board 301 in this embodiment) that plays a main function of effect control and a sub-sub-board (in this embodiment) specialized for a specific effect function such as image creation. Sub-sub-substrate 302), but the term "sub-substrate" is intended to include these. In the lower right part on the back side of the set board 31, an external relay terminal board (“frame relay terminal board” or the like) that relays signals from the main board 102, the payout control board 103, etc. to a device outside the Pachinko gaming machine 10 (Also called) 46 is provided.

The function of changing the setting on the main board 102 described above is a function of changing the set value that defines theoretical ease of hitting (the degree of advantage of the player). In the present embodiment, six types of integer values “1” to “6” are provided as the set values, and for each of these set values, a probability value related to a theoretical big hit or a small hit, and The payout rate is different. The change of the set value and the jackpot probability for each set value will be described later.
<Board surface composition of game board>

Next, the above-mentioned game board 50 and parts (board surface parts) arranged on the board surface of the game board 50 will be described. In this embodiment, the game board 50 is composed of a plurality of parts made of transparent resin material (for example, transparent acrylic resin) or wood (plywood board). The game board 50 is formed in a plate shape and has a game ball passage for guiding the game balls to the back side of the game board 50, a predetermined space, and the like. Then, the gaming board 50 is mounted on the front frame 13 of the gaming machine frame 11 with the board surface on which various board surface components are mounted facing forward, and by the glass door 15 and the like in the closed state, The front is covered. Further, on the front side of the game board 50, a game area 52 is defined by combining inner rails and outer rails formed in a curved band shape.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the game area 52, a first starting winning opening 62, a second starting winning opening 63, a special winning opening device 90 (attacker unit), an operating opening 68, a plurality of general winning openings 72, and 1, an outlet (58), which is arranged at the bottom of the game area 52 and hidden behind the operation button 22 in FIG. 1, is provided. Further, the game area 52 is provided with an effect display device 60 including a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying for effect, a center ornament 64 for decorating the periphery of the effect display device 60, and the like.

In addition, the game area 52 is provided with a large number of game nails (not shown) and a mechanism such as a windmill. It is also possible not to provide a windmill. Further, a main control display device 53 is provided outside the lower left part of the game area 52 of the game board 50. The specific configuration and function of the main control display device 53 will be described later. Further, the above-described board surface configuration of the game board 50 can be variously changed depending on, for example, the game characteristics adopted in the pachinko game machine 10.
<Functions of board parts>

Next, specific functions and configurations related to the individual board components described above will be described. First, the above-mentioned first starting winning opening 62 is a starting winning opening related to the first game, and is of a type that always opens the entrance of the game ball and does not change the size of the entrance of the game ball. Further, the first starting winning opening 62 has a first starting winning detection device 74 (sensor) for detecting the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 62, and the output signal of this sensor is the above-mentioned. Is input to the main board 102 of.

The above-mentioned second starting winning opening 63 is a starting winning opening relating to the second game, and is arranged on the right side of the first starting winning opening 62. The second start winning opening 63 is a starting opening for an ordinary electric accessory (so-called “electric tulip” or “electric Chu”), and one side is displayed when the ordinary symbol described later is stopped and displayed in a winning manner. A blade (opening/closing blade) that performs an opening operation is provided (on the right side in FIG. 1). Then, the second start winning opening 63 is opened by opening and closing the opening and closing blades for a predetermined time based on the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 63. It will be possible. Note that the invention is not limited to the aspect of the present embodiment, and a normal electric auditors product may not be provided in the starting opening for the second game, or a normal electric auditors product may be arranged for the starting opening for the first game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second starting winning opening 63 is provided with a second starting winning detection device 75 (sensor) and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 76 for opening and closing the above-mentioned opening/closing blade. .. The output signal of the second starting prize detection device 75 is input to the main board 102.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types are provided as an aspect of opening the second starting winning opening 63. These opening modes include a mode of relatively short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) (referred to as “short open” or “short opening”) or a relatively long time (for example, 5 seconds). There are modes (referred to as “long open”, “long open”, etc.). It is also possible to provide a middle opening mode in which the opening time is set between the short opening and the long opening.

As shown in FIG. 3, the above-mentioned general winning opening 72 is provided with a general winning detection device 73 (sensor) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The output signal of the general winning detection device 73 is input to the main board 102.

When the general winning award detecting device 73 is shared by a plurality of general award winning openings 72, the game balls having a plurality of general award winning openings 72 are collected at a position where the general award detecting device 73 is arranged and detected. It is possible to It is also possible to group a plurality of general winning openings 72 for each positional relationship or for each number of prize balls (common winning detection device 73 is shared).

The above-mentioned special winning opening device 90 is formed in a case shape by combining parts made of transparent synthetic resin, and although not shown, a big winning opening visible to the player is provided inside thereof. .. The special winning opening has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and an opening/closing door 91 (shown by a broken line in FIG. 1) for opening and closing the opening is provided inside. Then, the special winning opening is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined hit occurs. Here, in this embodiment, the special winning opening is opened upward, and the opening/closing door 91 is slidable in the front-rear direction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the special winning opening device 90 is a big winning detecting device 78 for detecting the entrance of a game ball, and a big winning opening (open) solenoid for driving the opening/closing door 91 to open and close. Equipped with 80. Of these, the special winning detection device 78 has a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the special winning opening device 90, and the output signal thereof is input to the main board 102.

Various types can be adopted as the special winning opening device 90. For example, as the special winning opening device 90, it is possible to employ a device having a large winning opening opened forward, a device having an upward opening, or the like. Further, as the special winning opening device 90, a plurality of types of operation patterns (opening and closing patterns) related to the opening and closing door 91 for opening and closing the special winning opening are provided, and a plurality of different operation patterns are provided during a big hit game in which a special game is executed. It is possible to employ a device that operates the opening/closing door 91 by the above. Further, as the special winning opening device 90, it is possible to adopt a device having a plurality of special winning openings and distributing a game ball to each special winning opening according to a game situation.

As shown in FIG. 3, the aforementioned operation port 68 is provided with a passage detection device 69, and this passage detection device 69 has a sensor for detecting passage of a game ball through the operation port 68. Then, the output signal of the sensor in the passage detection device 69 is input to the main board 102, and the passage detection device 69 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence/absence of a ball.

As shown in FIG. 3, the above-mentioned out-port 58 includes an out-ball detecting device (out-port sensor) 82. This out-out sensor 82 detects a game ball (out ball) that has entered the out port 58 without becoming a winning ball (safe ball) in the game area 52. Then, the detection result of the out-outlet sensor 82 is used for counting out-balls and for displaying (base display) on a performance display unit (ball-on state display 808 of FIG. 5 described later) described later. There is.

The center decoration 64 described above has a function of production and the like, and inside the center decoration 64, an LED substrate on which a large number of chip-type LEDs are mounted is provided. By driving the LED of the center decoration 64, the light of the LED is transmitted through the center decoration 64, and the center decoration 64 performs light decoration (light effect). Furthermore, the light decoration in the center decoration 64 is performed not only during the game, but also during the waiting for the start of the game, during the game preparation for the player to adjust the light amount (set the light amount), and the like. Details regarding these will be described later.

In addition, a plurality of movable effect members are provided on the back surface (inside) of the center decoration 64, and these movable effect members form a gimmick for effect. These movable effect members are usually hidden inside the center ornament 64 as shown in FIG. However, when a predetermined effect is performed, although not shown, these movable effect members appear in front of the effect display device 60.

Further, in the present embodiment, light decoration (light effect) is also performed on the movable effect member. Further, the light decoration on the movable effect member is performed not only during the game but also during the waiting for the start of the game or during the game preparation for the player to adjust the light amount.

Further, a game ball passage portion 65 is formed on the right side of the center decoration 64 when viewed from the front, and the center decoration 64 has the function of the flow path of the game ball in addition to the above-mentioned effect function. Have

Further, the center decoration 64 is provided with a light guide plate 88. As the light guide plate 88, although not shown, for example, a plate having two transparent plates arranged in parallel with the plate surfaces facing forward and backward can be adopted. Further, the light guide plate 88 is attached to the center decoration 64, and shields between the outside and the inside of the center decoration 64 in front of the effect display device 60. The light guide plate 88 also functions as a protective cover for the effect display device 60 in the center decoration 64.

The light guide plate 88 can be configured as follows, for example. That is, inside the center decoration 64, a plurality of LEDs serving as light sources are arranged in strips so as to face, for example, one of the left and right end surfaces of the transparent plate. Then, in normal times, the display content of the effect display device 60 is transmitted to the outside of the transparent plate so that the player can visually recognize it without superimposing another image on the screen of the effect display device 60.

However, inside each transparent plate that constitutes the light guide plate 88, fine irregularities that cannot be visually recognized under a normal environment are formed. Then, at the time of performing a predetermined effect, for example, the above-mentioned light source facing the end surface of one of the transparent plates is driven, and the light of the light source is emitted from the end surface of the transparent plate toward the inside of the transparent plate. It Further, the unevenness of the transparent plate irradiated with light diffuses the light, and the diffused light causes a predetermined illustration or the like to be colored and emerged so that it can be recognized by the player.

Further, of the two transparent plates of the light guide plate 88, the other transparent plate is engraved with irregularities for forming an image different from the above-described illustration. Then, by driving the light source facing the end face at the time of a predetermined effect, an illustration different from the ones described above and the like emerge so that it can be recognized by the player.

Here, not only one end surface of the left and right of the transparent plate, but also one of the upper and lower end surfaces of the transparent plate can be made to face the light source, and other illustrations can be projected by the light of the light source. By doing so, it is possible to display two types of images on one transparent plate. Further, the number of transparent plates may be one, or three or more. A transmissive liquid crystal display may be used instead of or in combination with the light guide plate 88.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main control display device 53 described above includes a symbol display board (main symbol display board) 256 on which a large number of LED indicators are arranged. On the symbol display board 256, a normal symbol display section 59 for displaying the above-mentioned normal symbol, a first special symbol display section 70 for displaying a first special symbol (described later) corresponding to the first game, and a second game. A second special symbol display portion 71 for displaying a second special symbol (to be described later) and other various display portions are formed to be visible to the player from the front of the gaming machine. The normal symbol display unit 59 described above constitutes a normal symbol display device. Further, the first special symbol display unit 70 constitutes the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display unit 71 constitutes the second special symbol display device.

In the following, the ordinary symbol is "general symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "first special symbol", "special symbol 1", "special symbol 1", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". It may be referred to as "second special map", "special map 2", "special 2", or the like. Further, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1" or "symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2" or "symbol 2".

Further, the above-mentioned main control display device 53 means one provided in the game board 50, but as will be described later, a setting display unit (setting in FIG. 5A described later) provided on the main board 102. The main control display device may include a display device 807), a performance display unit (ball entering state display device 808 of FIG. 5A described later), and the like. In that case, the setting display unit and the performance display unit provided on the main board 102 can also be referred to as, for example, a “main board side main control display device”.
<Basic game procedure>

Subsequently, a game procedure in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, when the player operates and rotates the above-mentioned firing handle 20 in a situation where the game balls are supplied to the upper ball plate 18, the upper ball plate 18 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle. The game balls stored in 1 are shot one by one at a predetermined interval. Then, the game ball is guided by the inner rail and the outer rail described above, reaches the upper part of the game area 52, and is discharged to the game area 52 from between the inner rail and the outer rail.

In a normal game, the player shoots so that the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 52, and aims at the first start winning opening 62 located in the lower center part of the game area 52. Such a mode of launching mainly using the left side of the game area 52 is called so-called left hitting. Further, the firing of the game balls is repeated at a predetermined time interval (for example, an interval not exceeding 100 shots per minute) by the above-described launching device 43 while the player operates the firing handle 20. Then, the game balls continuously emitted to the game area 52 drop in a direction according to factors such as the speed and the incident angle (or the reflection angle) while interfering with the plurality of game nails and the windmill.

When the game ball falls into various prize holes such as the above-described general prize hole 72 and the first start prize hole 62, the game ball is detected and the payout control of the game ball is performed. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper ball plate 18 as prize balls through the payout unit 35 according to the type of the winning opening that entered. Moreover, when the upper ball plate 18 is filled with many game balls and the paid out subsequent game balls cannot enter the upper ball plate 18, these game balls are guided to the lower ball plate 19 as overflow balls. ..

In addition, the game balls that have fallen into the various winning openings become safe balls and are guided from the front surface side to the back surface side of the game board 50. Further, the game ball that has not become a safe ball reaches the lower end of the game area 52, falls into the out port (58), and is guided to the back surface side of the game board 50. Then, the game ball reaching the back side of the game board 50 is guided downward through a predetermined guide gutter and a game ball passage in the set base 31, and is directed from the pachinko game machine 10 to the side of the island facility described above. Is discharged.

The above-mentioned operation port 68 is a gate through which a game ball passes, unlike the above-described winning hole for generating a safe ball. In the following description, the working opening 68 will be referred to as a “winning hole”, and the terms “drop”, “ball”, and “winning” in this embodiment include the meaning of “passing” related to the gate.

When the game ball enters the operating port 68, if a predetermined fluctuation start condition (universal figure fluctuation start condition), which will be described later, is satisfied, a normal symbol (described later) is displayed on the main control display device 53. Variable display. The normal symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 shows the result of a random number lottery (general diagram lottery) executed based on the ball entering the operation opening 68, and a stop display after a predetermined change time. To be done.

When the game ball enters the starting opening (here, the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63), a predetermined fluctuation start condition (special figure fluctuation start condition) as described later is satisfied. For example, on the main control display device 53, special symbols (described later) are variably displayed. The special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 shows the result of the random number lottery (big hit lottery) executed based on the ball entering the starting opening, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined change time. ..

In the above-mentioned effect display device 60, effect display related to the special symbol is performed. This effect display is different in whether the special symbol is being variably displayed or being stopped, and whether the stop display mode of the special symbol is a big hit or a disappointing one. Relatedly, effects of various predetermined modes are performed.

In the big hit game in which the special game is executed, the unit game in which the special winning opening device 90 is activated and the special winning opening (not shown) is opened is repeated a plurality of times. Further, in the special game, there are one in which the unit game is repeated the maximum number of times and one in which the unit game is repeated less than the maximum number of times. The maximum number of times may be 15 times (15R (round)), and the number of times less than the maximum number may be 5 times (5R). In addition, the special game in the case where the unit game in which the opening of the special winning opening is executed only once is referred to as "small hit".

In each unit game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected at the corresponding special winning opening, or when the total opening time reaches a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds), The exit conditions will be closed and the special winning opening will be closed. As the condition for ending the unit game, the total opening time indicates that the upper limit value is set even if the opening of the special winning opening is divided into plural times in one unit game. ing. In order to have a wide range of playability during a big hit, such as increasing the technical intervention by opening multiple winning holes in the unit game, and easily getting the ball out by opening it once. The opening mode of the special winning opening can be selected from preset patterns.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, a game property in which a plurality of games (here, two) corresponding to the conventional first type pachinko gaming machine are mixed is adopted. That is, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned plurality of games can be divided into a first game in which the first starting winning opening 62 is used and a second game in which the second starting winning opening 63 is used. Then, in a situation where the second game is prioritized over the first game and at the same time the start condition of the game is satisfied, the second game is preferentially executed and the first game is suspended, The first game and the second game are not executed at the same time.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, a specific game may be executed after the end of the special game depending on the result of the above-mentioned big hit lottery. This specific game is in a mode different from the special game described above, and is in a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In this embodiment, a probability variation game (hereinafter referred to as "probable variation"), a variation time reduction game (hereinafter referred to as "time saving"), and a ball entry facilitation game are provided as specific games. As the specific game, there are those that execute only one of probability change, time saving, and easy entry game, and there are those that execute a plurality of specific games at the same time, and different game characteristics are created by combining them.

When the specific game is executed, a notification about the launch position and launch timing of the game ball recommended by the image or sound of the effect display device 60 (for example, the effect of urging a right hit) is executed. Then, when the player increases the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 clockwise to increase the firing force and shoots the game ball toward the area on the right side of the game area 52, the game ball passing above the center ornament 64 , Enter the game ball passage portion 65 of the center decoration 64, and flow down the center decoration 64. Further, the game ball released from the center decoration 64 hits a plurality of game nails and other structures and falls in a direction corresponding to the way of hitting.

A part of the large number of game balls released from the center decoration 64 passes through the operating port 68 (see FIG. 1) and is detected by the passage detection device 69 (see FIG. 3). Then, as described above, when the game ball passes through the operating port 68, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7), and the variably display of the ordinary symbol is stopped in a predetermined hit mode. Then, the ordinary electric accessory of the second start winning port 63 is opened for a predetermined time in accordance with the hit mode.

In the present embodiment, the game ball that has reached the right side of the game area 52 can be guided to the vicinity of the second start winning opening 63 and the special winning opening device 90 by a nail or the like. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a game that facilitates entering a ball is added to the time saving that is a specific game, and during the time saving, an extension of the extension of an ordinary electric auditor, an ordinary electric role by the game that facilitates entering a ball. The probability variation of the object and the time reduction of the ordinary electric auditors are combined, so that the long opening of the ordinary electric auditors mentioned above is easily executed. Then, during the time saving, one or a plurality of game balls can enter the second starting winning opening 63 when the ordinary electric accessory of the second starting winning opening 63 expands once. ing.

In addition, when a big hit occurs and a special game is executed, a special winning opening (not shown) of the special winning opening device 90 is opened. It is possible to Then, in this case, before the special game is started, it is conceivable to execute an effect that prompts the player to hit the right side by using an image or sound of the effect display device 60.
<Example of jackpot type: ST>

Next, the types of big hits in the above-mentioned first game and second game will be described. First, as a big hit, a big hit that repeats the above-mentioned unit game 15 times (hereinafter, also referred to as "15R big hit" as appropriate) and a big hit that repeats the unit game 7 times (hereinafter, also referred to as "7R big hit" as appropriate) are provided. .. The lottery modes for these jackpots will be described later.

The unit game described above is started with the opening of the special winning opening in the special winning opening device 90 in the special game, and when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (for example, 10 When more than one game ball falls, the game ends and the special winning opening is closed. The special game in which such a unit game is repeated is based on a so-called ball-out (sometimes referred to as a ball-out) aiming to allow the player to acquire a game ball. Furthermore, among various jackpots, the 15R jackpot, the 7R jackpot, and the like are intended to make the player obtain a relatively large number of game balls.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide, for example, a 15R jackpot or a part of the 15R jackpot, which is not a definite change (15R regular or 7R regular), as one type of jackpot. Further, for example, even if the 15R big hit, the opening period of the special winning opening is short, and the player can obtain only the same amount of balls as the 5R big hit (15R probability variation (actual 5R)), or the 5R big hit. However, it is possible to provide a device such that the player can hardly obtain a ball (for example, only a minimum degree (for example, 1 ball) in each R enters the special winning opening device 90).

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific game state such as the above-mentioned probability change or time saving is generated for a predetermined specific jackpot. As a mode of occurrence of such a specific game state, for example, a jackpot that does not give at least a part of the privilege functions such as probability change, time saving, and easy-to-enter game can be provided. More specifically, it is conceivable to provide a big hit only with a certain change or a big hit only with a shortened time. Further, it is also possible to make the types of big hits different depending on the difference in the continuation period of the probability change and the difference in the time reduction period. In addition, in the case where the electric choo support is also executed during the time saving, the “time saving duration” can be rephrased as the “electrical chewing support duration”. Further, it may be possible to execute only the electric Chu support among the time saving and the electric Chu support.

However, the combination of the big hit and the probability change or the shortening of time is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and various combinations can be adopted. For example, the probability change may occur for all jackpots. In this case, all of the 15R jackpots in this embodiment are 15R jackpots with a certain variation (15R probability variation), and all the 7R jackpots are 7R jackpots with a certain variation (7R probability variation).
<Hits other than big hits>

Further, in this embodiment, a small hit is provided as a kind of hit other than the big hit. When the small hit occurs in the first game (or the second game), the special winning opening device 90 is opened, for example, once. The lottery mode for small wins will be described later.
<Main control display device>
<<Configuration of main control display device>>

Next, the main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) described above will be described with reference to FIG. The main control display device 53 on the game board side, as shown in FIG. 7, by arranging a large number (here, 36) of LED indicator lights in two rows (upper row and lower row) on the symbol display board 256 It is configured. In this embodiment, the number of LED indicator lights in the upper and lower stages is 18, and the LED indicator lights in each stage are arranged at equal intervals in the horizontal direction. In addition, the intervals between the LED indicator lights that are in the upper and lower positions are constant for all 18 LEDs.

In the main control display device 53, the ten LED indicators at the right end in the upper stage when viewed from the front are used for the information display according to the special figure 1, and the ten LED indicators at the right end in the lower stage are shown in the special diagram 2. It is designed to be used for displaying such information. Then, in the upper and lower rows, the two LED indicators at the right end constitute a first special symbol storage display section 83 and a second special symbol storage display section 84, which indicate the number of reserved memories. The eight LED indicators arranged on the left side of the first special symbol storage display section 83 constitute the first special symbol display section 70 described above, and the eight LED rows arranged on the left side of the second special symbol storage display section 84. The individual LED indicator lights constitute the above-mentioned second special symbol display portion 71.

The first special symbol display unit 70 is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol relating to the first game by the operation mode of the eight LED indicators arranged in a line in the horizontal direction. The first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 70 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first lottery that is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 62, and its variable display is predetermined. When it is stopped in the hit mode, a big hit occurs and a special game is executed. It should be noted that the first special symbol display unit 70, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, is a maximum of 255 (=2^8) except a case where all the LED indicators are turned on and off by a combination of turning on and off. -1) The type of identification information can be displayed.

Similarly for the above-mentioned second special symbol display portion 71, at the time of the stop display of the second special symbol, the maximum is 255 (=2) by the operation mode of the eight LED indicators arranged in a row in the lateral direction. ^8) The type of identification information can be displayed.

Further, in the upper row, the four LED indicator lights arranged on the left side of the first special symbol display portion 70 are adapted to be used for displaying information related to the ordinary symbol (general symbol). Then, the two LED indicator lights arranged on the left side of the first special symbol display section 70 described above constitute a normal symbol storage display section 85 for displaying the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol, and on the left side thereof. The two LED display lamps arranged side by side constitute a normal symbol display portion 59.

The normal symbol display section 59 is configured to perform a variable display and a stop display of the normal symbol depending on the operation mode of the two LED indicators. Then, the normal symbol display portion 59 can display a maximum of 3 (=2^2-1) types of identification information at the time of stop display.

Further, the round number display section 86 is composed of two LEDs arranged on the left side of the normal symbol display section 59 in the upper row and four LED indicators at the lower left edge of the lower row located therebelow. Further, in the lower stage, the four LED indicators between the number-of-rounds display section 86 and the second special symbol display section 71 are a first status display section (status display lamp 1) 87a and a second status display section in order from the left. The (state indicator lamp 2) 87b, the third state indicator (state indicator lamp 3) 87c, and the fourth state indicator (state indicator lamp 4) 87d.

The above-mentioned first state display portion 87a is lit up when the probability variation function according to the special figure is activated, and the second state display portion 87b is lit up when the probability variation function according to the general figure is activated. There is. In addition, the second state display portion 87b is also lit up when the extension is opened, which is a so-called electric support (electric chewing support) state. Further, the third state display portion 87c is used as a separate (right) state indicator light. Further, the fourth state display portion 87d is used as an error indicator lamp.

Here, the above-mentioned third state display portion 87c (divided state indicator light) is adapted to be lit up not only during the electric power support state but also during a big hit. In addition, during the big hit, the flag for setting the electric power support state (the electric power support flag) and the like are turned off even if the long-distance vacation is in progress. Further, the third state display portion 87c is also lit up when the long opening of the ordinary electric accessory in the states other than these (normal state) is opened.

The main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) having such a configuration is electrically connected to the main board 102 described above, as shown in FIG. The various display portions of the main control display device 53 are controlled by the main board 102. In FIG. 3, among the various display units in the main control display device 53, only the normal symbol display unit 59, the first special symbol display unit 70, and the second special symbol display unit 71 are shown.
<<Functions of main control display device>>

When the game ball passes through the operating port 68 described above, the normal symbol display portion 59 blinks, and the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. Then, when a predetermined variation time (general figure variation time) has elapsed since the variation display of the ordinary symbol was started, the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. And, if the normal pattern is displayed in the off mode (out mode), if there is a ball entering the subsequent working port after the elapse of a predetermined stop time (normal time stop fixed time), The next variable display related to the design is started. In addition, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode (hit mode), the transition to the next variable display is performed in the same manner as in the case of a hit, while the normal symbol that was previously stopped and displayed is hit. According to the aspect, the second start winning opening 63 performs an opening operation for a predetermined time.

The number of holdings related to this general symbol lottery is the number of game balls that have passed through the operating opening 68 during the change of the normal symbol, and indicates the number of times of the general symbol lottery in which the variable display of the normal symbol has not been executed yet. That is, if the symbol variation that has been performed previously in the normal symbol storage display unit 85 has not ended, the variation start condition is not satisfied, and when the symbol variation ends, the variation start condition is satisfied and is held. Based on the stored lottery result (held lottery result), a new symbol variation will be started. The upper limit of the number of reservations is four, and the number of reservation storages is set to not exceed four.

Normally, the four types of numerical values displayed by the symbol storage display unit 85 are turned off when the number of holdings is 0 (no holding), and are turned on when the number of holdings is one. It is possible to turn off the other. When the number of holdings is 2, both are turned on, when the number of holdings is 3, one of them is turned on and the other is blinked, and when the number of holdings is 4, both of them are blinked. Can be displayed.

The display of the number of reserved first special symbols by the first special symbol storage display unit 83 is performed by displaying four types of information with two LED indicator lights as one set. The display of the number of second special symbols held by the second special symbol storage display section 84 is also performed by displaying four types of information with two LED indicator lights as one set.

Note that when the game situation in which the above-mentioned right-handed hit is to be performed, display is performed in a predetermined manner using the third state display portion 86c of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7). In the present embodiment, the third state display portion 86c is set to turn off when left-handed, which is a game situation where left-handedness is required, and turn on when right-handed, which is a game situation where right-handedness is required.
<Structure of display device and basic display contents>

Next, the configuration of the effect display device 60 described above and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In this embodiment, as the effect display device 60, a large-sized (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, effect display for the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 described above, and other effect display such as story display are performed. Although various images are displayed on the effect display device 60, here, the basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started on the main control display device 53, on the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. A variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a symbol (also referred to as a “decorative symbol”) 190 is executed. In this embodiment, the effect design 190 is composed of a left effect design 190a, a middle effect design 190b, and a right effect design 190c. In the following, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 190a to 190c may be referred to as "effect symbol 190" or "effect symbols 190a to 190c" depending on the situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect design 190 has seven kinds of element designs (symbol element effect designs) having the meanings of the symbols “1” to “7”. Further, here, in order not to make the description complicated, the description will be made using seven types of element designs having the meanings of the symbols “1” to “7”, but as the element designs, for example, a predetermined word, etc. It is also possible to adopt a design having a meaning other than numbers, as in. Further, as the elemental design, it is also possible to use a combination having a meaning of a number and one having another meaning. In addition, in order to execute a special effect (pseudo continuous notice or special zone effect described later), an effect suggestion that appears only at a certain fluctuation (added to the normal symbol or displayed by being replaced) is performed. In the broad sense, the special symbol for is also included in the effect symbol 190.

With the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8A). In the present embodiment, in the variable display of the effect symbols, the left effect symbols 190a to the right effect symbols 190c are individually moved in the vertical direction (vertical scrolling), and the above-described element symbols are sequentially displayed in the display area 194. Executed by. As the scroll direction of the effect symbols 190a to 190c, in addition to the vertical direction, various modes such as a horizontal direction, rotation, or turning can be adopted.

Further, the effect design 190 may form a so-called “reach” combination as an intermediate stage of variable display. In this "reach", among the effect symbols 190, two effect symbols (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) have the same numbers, such as "7" and "7", and the same meaning, Alternatively, the combination is composed of symbols having a predetermined relationship. Further, in this "reach", the remaining 1 symbol (here, medium symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that constitute the reach combination cannot be configured in combination with another effect symbol, and is changing. Has become.

As the display mode of the effect design 190, various types of “reach” and other various modes can be adopted, and details of the various display modes will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects are performed in addition to the effect by the effect pattern 190, and details thereof will be described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses the liquid crystal display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other types of display bodies such as a mechanical drum body and an LED display body are used. It may be one. Furthermore, the effect display device 60 is not limited to one including only one display body, and may be configured by combining a plurality of display bodies with additional display bodies added, for example.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member and configure a gimmick by the additional display body. Then, normally, an additional display body is arranged outside the display area 194 so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In this case, it is conceivable that the additional display body appears in front of the display area 194.
<Configuration related to setting change function>

Next, a configuration relating to the above-mentioned setting change and a method of changing the setting will be described. FIG. 5A shows a partially enlarged view of the state where the main substrate 102 is housed in the transparent substrate case 801, and FIG. 5B shows a cross section taken along the line AA in FIG. 5A. It is enlarged and shown schematically. In FIG. 5A, the substrate case 801 is formed of a colorless and transparent plastic material into a box-like structure having a divided structure (for example, a two-part structure).

The divided structure of the substrate case 801 is, for example, one in which a cover body is combined with a substrate holder that holds the main substrate 102, and the substrate holder and the cover body are joined via a caulking structure that leaves a trace during separation. Can be adopted. In the board case 801, a connector 802 (only a part of which is shown with reference numerals) used for connection with other devices such as the sub-main board 301 is formed with a size that does not create a gap as much as possible. It is exposed from the opened opening.

The main board 102 is visible through the transparent board case 801, but in FIG. 5A, the CPU (main CPU) 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the above-mentioned setting display 807, and the above-mentioned input box are also shown. The sphere state indicator 808 is shown by a broken line, and other devices are not shown. Of these, the test terminal mounting area 806 is an area in which the test terminals are mounted only when performing a ball output test or the like in the product testing stage, and the test terminals are not mounted in the main substrate 102 in the mass production stage. Not not.

The above-mentioned setting display unit 807 displays the selected set value only when changing the setting or confirming the setting. Then, the setting indicator 807 indicates the current setting with respect to the set value for changing the operation probability of the accessory continuous operation device (the operation probability of the device that continuously operates the special electric auditors product, so-called big hit probability). The value can be displayed. Further, a one-digit 7-segment display is used as the setting display 807. Here, in the present embodiment, although not shown, a dot display section is provided in the lower right corner of the 7-segment display in the setting display 807.

A setting key cylinder (also referred to as a “setting key switch”) 809 and a setting change button (also referred to as a “setting change switch”) 810 are arranged near the setting display unit 807. A change button 810 or the like constitutes a setting change operation unit 811. As shown in FIG. 5B, the setting changing operation unit 811 opens the setting changing opening/closing lid 812 (hereinafter, referred to as “opening/closing lid”) 812 of the substrate case 801, so that the setting changing operation unit 811 is displayed as shown in FIG. It is exposed as shown.

The opening/closing lid 812 is formed integrally with the substrate case 801, for example, via a resin hinge, and the protruding knob portion 813 is pulled by fingers to open it as shown by an arrow B while resisting the elastic force. Can be illustrated. When closing the opening/closing lid 812, the lid 812 is laid down (not shown) from the state of FIG. 5B, and the free end side is locked to the substrate case 801.

The above-mentioned entry state indicator 808 is used as a performance indicator of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and can display the base (value of the number of prize balls per number of shots) for each gaming state. In this embodiment, as shown by the solid line in the lower right part of FIG. 5A, a 7-segment indicator for four digits is used as the entry state indicator 808. Further, a dot display section (reference numeral omitted) is provided in the lower right corner of the 7-segment display of each digit of the incoming ball status display 808.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the CPU 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the ball entry status indicator 808, the setting change operation section 811, and the setting indicator 807 are wrapped in a plan view (rear view of the gaming machine). It is arranged so as not to overlap (do not overlap). Further, in order to prevent misidentification of the display, the entry state indicator 808 and the setting indicator 807 are arranged with a gap of a predetermined distance or more (for example, 30 mm or more).

In this embodiment, the left side in FIG. 5B is the free end when the gaming machine frame 11 is opened, and the setting change operation section 811 and the setting display 807 are arranged near the free end side. By doing so, it is possible to easily change the set value, and the like, while the ball entry state indicator 808 is arranged on the rotating shaft (fixed end) side when the gaming machine frame 11 is opened. When the game machine frame is opened, consideration is given to prevent the display information from being unintentionally viewed by the player. Of course, when giving priority to fraud prevention when changing the set value, etc., the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 may be formed on the right side of the main board 102 in the front view (the rotation axis side of the gaming machine frame 11). Good.

Here, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the above points, an opening/closing lid 812 is provided at a portion corresponding to the setting change operating unit 811 so that the setting change operating unit 811 cannot be easily accessed, and the set value of the setting value is set. The setting change operation unit 811 is configured not to be exposed, except for the case of changing work and checking setting information. Hereinafter, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, the setting key (key) can be inserted into the setting key insertion port (reference numeral omitted) of the setting key cylinder 809 on the upper surface portion of the substrate case 801 in the positional relationship corresponding to the setting change operation unit 811. Further, an opening 816 having a predetermined size is formed so that the setting change button 810 can be operated. However, by forming a partition wall such as a side wall from the opening 816 toward the upper surface of the main board 102, it is possible to prevent access to other electronic components (for example, the CPU 501) of the main board 102 through the opening 816. Has become. Further, a setting key cylinder 809 having a setting key insertion opening (reference numeral omitted) corresponding to the opening 816 and a push type setting change button 810 are vertically arranged when viewed from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Further, the opening/closing lid 812 corresponding to the size of the opening 816 is provided on the substrate case 801 so as to be openable/closable in a state in which the opening/closing lid 812 is biased in a direction to always close the opening 816.

Next, a brief description will be given of an operation method for changing settings and the operation of setting change/setting display. When confirming the set value, first, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated to turn off the power, and then the opening/closing lid 812 is opened at a predetermined angle against the urging force to set the key cylinder 809. Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key slot and rotate the key to the right. Then, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again without pressing the initialization switch 544 to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value (for example, the corresponding numerical value if the setting value range is “1” to “6”) is displayed on the setting display 807 formed by the 7-segment LED, and the setting display mode is set. In order to indicate that there is some segment (here, the dot portion) is driven to light. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is activated (for example, a state in which control based on an input relating to the progress of the game, such as a winning detection of a starting winning opening, can be executed), a setting value change process Is configured so that it cannot.

On the other hand, when changing the set value, first, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated to turn off the power, and then the opening/closing lid 812 is opened at a predetermined angle against the biasing force, and the setting key is pressed. The setting key (key) is inserted into the setting key insertion port of the cylinder 809, and the key is rotated to the right. Then, while pressing the initialization switch 544, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value is displayed in blinking on the setting display 807 formed by the 7-segment LED, and a part of the segment (here, the dot portion) is turned off (turned off) to indicate the setting change mode. Is displayed.

In this state, each time the setting change button 810 is pressed, a new set value obtained by incrementing the current set value by +1 is temporarily stored, and the stored set value is displayed on the setting display 807. The manager in the game arcade operates the setting change button 810 so as to obtain an arbitrary (purpose) set value. In the present embodiment, if the setting value at power-on is "1", "1" "2"... "5" "6" "1" each time the setting change button 810 is pressed once. Is changed to ".

Then, when the key inserted in the setting key cylinder 809 is rotated to the left while the setting change button is operated to change the setting value to an arbitrary setting value (the setting display unit 807 displays the arbitrary setting value), the setting is changed. After the change process is completed, the set value is displayed on the setting display unit 807 for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms), and at the same time, a part of the segment (here, a dot portion) is displayed and then the set value is displayed. And both dots are turned off.
<Structure of display device and basic display contents>

Next, the configuration of the effect display device 60 described above and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In this embodiment, as the effect display device 60, a large-sized (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, effect display for the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 described above, and other effect display such as story display are performed. Although various images are displayed on the effect display device 60, here, the basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started on the main control display device 53, on the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. The variable display of the symbol (also referred to as a decorative symbol) 190 is executed. In this embodiment, the effect design 190 is composed of a left effect design 190a, a middle effect design 190b, and a right effect design 190c.

Further, in the present embodiment, the left effect design 190a has nine types of element designs (symbol element effect designs) having the meanings of the symbols "1" to "9". And, the middle effect design 190b and the right effect design 190c, which are other effect symbols, also have nine types of element symbols meaning the numbers "1" to "9", like the left effect symbol 190a. The details of the above-mentioned elemental designs will be described later.

With the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8A). In the present embodiment, in the variable display of the effect symbols, the left effect symbols 190a to the right effect symbols 190c are individually moved in the vertical direction (vertical scrolling), and the above-described element symbols are sequentially displayed in the display area 194. Executed by.

Further, the effect design 190 may form a so-called “reach” combination as an intermediate stage of variable display. In this "reach", among the effect symbols 190, two effect symbols (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) have the same numbers, such as "7" and "7", and the same meaning, Alternatively, the combination is composed of symbols having a predetermined relationship. Further, in this "reach", the remaining 1 symbol (here, medium symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that constitute the reach combination cannot be configured in combination with another effect symbol, and is changing. Has become.

As the display mode of the effect design 190, various types of “reach” and other various modes can be adopted, and details of the various display modes will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects are performed in addition to the effect by the effect pattern 190, and details thereof will be described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses the liquid crystal display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other types of display bodies such as a mechanical drum body and an LED display body are used. It may be one. Furthermore, the effect display device 60 is not limited to one including only one display body, and may be configured by combining a plurality of display bodies with additional display bodies added, for example.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member and configure a gimmick by the additional display body. Then, normally, an additional display body is arranged outside the display area 194 so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In this case, it is conceivable that the additional display body appears in front of the display area 194.
<Electrical structure of Pachinko game machine>

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, the main ones of the electrical configuration will be extracted and described. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 10 includes a power supply board 251, a payout control board 103, a main board 102, a sub-main board 301, and the like. Of these, the power supply board 251 is connected to the above-mentioned payout control board 103, the game ball and other lending device connection terminal board 106, the launch control board 107, and the like. Further, the main board 102 is connected to the payout control board 103 via a frame relay terminal board 108. Further, the main board 102 is connected to a main symbol display board (also referred to as “symbol display board”) 256 that constitutes the main control display device 53, and a sub-main board 301. The sub-sub-board 302 described above is connected.

The power supply board 251 of the various configurations described above is provided in the power supply unit 32 (see FIG. 2) described above. A frame effect connection board 300 and a lending device connection terminal plate (not shown) such as gaming balls are connected to the power supply substrate 251, and a ball is connected to the lending device connection terminal plate (not shown) such as gaming balls. A ball-coin operation board and the like used for currency operations are connected.

A touch switch 310 provided on the firing handle 20 (see FIGS. 1 and 20) is connected to the firing control board 105 described above. Although not shown, the touch switch 310 is connected with a firing touch lever and a grounding metal fitting. A touch switch (also referred to as a “touch sensor”) 310 detects the contact when a player, a game hall clerk, or the like touches the firing handle 20 with a finger (FIG. 20(b)), and outputs a form of an output signal. Change.

Further, to the firing control board 105, the firing strength volume 311, the firing stop switch 312, and the above-mentioned firing device 43 are connected. Of these, the firing intensity volume 1311 is used to change the firing intensity of the game ball according to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 20. The firing stop switch 312 is used to stop the firing by detecting an operation with a part of the finger (eg thumb) holding the firing handle 20.

Electric power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103 and the frame relay terminal board. Further, on the main board 102, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control display device 53, respective passage detection devices 69a and 69b, and a normal electric motor through a game board connection board and a game board relay terminal plate (not shown). Object solenoid 76, first start winning detection device 74, second starting winning detection device 75, general winning detection device 73, big winning detection device 78, big winning opening (open) solenoid 80, and magnetic sensor or radio wave sensor (illustration) (Omitted) etc. are connected. Here, in the present embodiment, regarding the connection of the first start prize detecting device 74 and the second start prize detecting device 75 to the main board 102, the game board connecting board and the game board relay terminal board are not directly interposed. Has been done.

Electric power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the sub-main board 301 via the frame effect connection board 300 and the frame connection board 303. Further, on the sub-main board 301, in addition to the frame connection board 303 and the frame effect connection board 300 described above, a glass frame effect connection relay board 305 and a glass frame effect connection board 306 are used for effects in the gaming machine frame 11. Each device is connected.

As each device for production in the pachinko game machine 10, there are a frame electric decoration L2 substrate 317, a frame electric decoration R2 substrate 318, (left) speaker 21 (L), (right) speaker 21 (R), and the like. Further, in the present embodiment, a cross key (cross button) board, a performance button board, a lifting motor, a performance button (operation button) motor, a button position sensor, etc. are provided, but these are not shown in FIG. doing.

Further, a game board device, an image display device, a voice control device, and the like are also connected to the sub-main substrate 301. Among these, as a device for a game board, there is a board surface illumination connection board 331. The board surface decorative connection board 331 is connected to the sub-main board 301 via the frame connection board 303 and the effect interface board 304 described above. Then, the panel illumination connection board 331 is connected to the center illumination board 332 used for illumination of the center ornament 64. Although not shown in the figure, a production sensor board, other illumination boards, a production motor, and the like are also connected to the board surface illumination connection board 331. Here, although not shown in the figure, various kinds of lighting boards and effect motors are connected to the effect interface board 304.

The image display device connected to the sub-main substrate 301 includes a sub-sub substrate (image control substrate) 302, and the sub-sub substrate 302 includes a liquid crystal unit (also called a liquid crystal module) via an image display connection A substrate 336. 42) is connected. Here, in the present embodiment, although not shown, another liquid crystal unit connected to the production interface board 304 via the image display connection B board is also provided. Further, as the above-mentioned audio control devices connected to the sub-main board 301, there are an audio control board (audio board) 339 and an audio ROM (ROM) board 340.

Subsequently, configurations of the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, a CPU (main CPU) 501, a ROM (main ROM) 502, and an RWM 503 are mounted on the main board 102. Among these, as the CPU 501, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. The "ROM" and "RWM" described in the present embodiment are a comprehensive concept including both the one built in the CPU device and the one externally attached to the CPU device.

Further, although not shown, in the CPU device mounted on the main board 102, in addition to the CPU 501, a control clock generation circuit, a random number clock generation circuit, a 16-bit random number random number circuit, and an 8-bit random number. Random number circuit and the like are provided. Of these, the random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers and the random number circuit for 8-bit random numbers are for generating hardware random numbers that are built-in random numbers.

Further, the main board 102 is provided with an input/output port 505 for inputting/outputting data to/from a device outside the main board 102. Further, although not shown, various circuit parts such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are formed on the main board 102.

The above-mentioned ROM 502 stores a game program for the CPU 501 to perform a game-related process, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the RWM 503 described above rewritably stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like when the game program is executed by the CPU 501.

Next, on the payout control board 103, a CPU (payout CPU) 511, a ROM (payout ROM) 512, and an RWM 513 are mounted. Among these, as the CPU 511, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. Further, the ROM 512 stores a payout program for the CPU 511 to perform payout processing, predetermined control data, and the like. The RWM 513 described above rewritably stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like when the CPU 501 executes the payout program.

The sub-main substrate 301 described above includes a CPU (sub-main CPU) 521, a ROM (sub-main ROM) 522, a work RWM 523, an input port 527, an output port 528, a bus line (not shown), and the like. .. The input side of the input port 527 is connected to the output side of the main board 102, and the output side of the input port 527 is connected to the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RWM 523, the output port 528, and the like.

The CPU 521 of the sub main board 301 controls the display of the effect display device 60 based on the effect control command (command) for symbol display transmitted from the main board 102. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data, and the work RWM 523 temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. Is the memory of.

Data transmission/reception between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301 described above is performed in a one-way communication (one-way communication) mode from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. Since one-way communication is ensured between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301, data cannot be transmitted from the sub-main board 301 to the main board 102. Therefore, the information held by the main board 102 cannot be referred to by the sub-main board 301 unless the main board 102 transmits the information to the sub-main board 301. In order to enable such one-way communication, for example, a communication restricting means (buffer circuit etc.) is mounted on the main board 102, and data output to the sub-main board 301 is controlled by this communication restricting means. Can be done through.

The sub-sub-board 302 described above includes a CPU 531, a work RWM 532, a program ROM 533, a character ROM 535, an image controller (VDP) 536, an input port 538, an output port 539, and a bus line (not shown). Further, the image controller (VDP) 536 includes a video memory 540. The input side of the input port 538 is connected to the output side of the sub-main substrate 301, and the output side of the input port 538 is connected to each of the devices such as the CPU 531, the work RWM 532, and the program ROM 533.

The above-mentioned video memory 540 is a memory for storing the display data displayed on the effect display device 60, and by rewriting the content of the image data in the video memory 540, the display content of the effect display device 60 (frame image ) Is changed. The character ROM 535 is a memory for storing character data such as a pattern displayed on the effect display device 60. The image controller 536 adjusts the operation timings of the CPU 531, the video memory 540, and the output port 539 to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the video memory 540 from the character ROM 535 at a predetermined timing. Further, the effect display device 60 is caused to display the symbols by superimposing the symbols in the order of the layers whose priorities are determined in advance.
<Power supply and data backup>

The power supply board 251 described above includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko gaming machine 10 and an initialization switch circuit unit 543 having an initialization switch 544. The power supply unit 541 supplies a necessary operating voltage to the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). More specifically, the power supply unit 541 takes in a predetermined voltage supplied from the outside and supplies a predetermined amount of voltage for driving various switches, motors, logic circuits, etc., to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103. And supply to other specified equipment.

The initialization switch circuit unit 543 is an initialization signal for clearing the backup data to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the initialization switch 544 is pressed by the manager of the game store when the power is turned on. It is equipped with a circuit for outputting. As will be described later, the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 can retain (back up) the stored data even when the power supply to the power supply board is cut off. Then, when the above initialization signal is input to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on, the data (backup data) backed up in the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 are returned. Cleared. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main board changes to the setting change state according to the input status of the initialization switch 544 and the input status of the setting key when the power is turned on. The presence/absence of initialization, the range of initialization, and the like can be determined according to the signal from the initialization switch circuit unit 543 and the input signal related to the setting key.

Note that the initialization switch 544 is divided into one for the main board 102 and one for the payout control board 103 so that the backed up data is cleared separately for the main board 102 and the payout control board 103. You may Further, for example, when the initialization switch 544 is operated at the time of turning on the power, the backup data for the main board 102 and a part of the backup data for the payout control board 103 are cleared and added to the payout control board 103. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the remaining backup data of the payout control board 103 is cleared by further operating the payout initialization switch (not shown).

As described above, the RWM 503 on the main board 102 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with the backup voltage from the power supply board 251 even after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off. That is, the RWM 503 is provided with a backup area 503a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 503a is a stack pointer at the time of power shutdown when the power is shut down (when a power failure occurs) due to the occurrence of a power failure (including a so-called momentary power failure that is a power failure due to an instantaneous voltage drop) , An area for storing values of each register, I/O, and the like. Then, along with the normal power-on and the elimination of the power failure, the state of the main board 102 and the like is returned to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area 503a.

The writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is cut off by the power-off processing (described later), and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is executed in the power-on processing when the power is turned on (described later). .. As the backup area 503a, it is possible to use an RWM (external RWM) externally attached to the CPU 501 and connected to a backup power supply.

As for the RWM 513 in the payout control board 103, similarly to the RWM 503 in the main board 102, a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply board 251 after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off, so that data can be retained (backup). It has become. That is, the RWM 513 of the payout control board 103 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 513a is for storing the stack pointer at the time of power shutdown, each register, the value of I/O, etc., when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like (when the power is interrupted). Area. Then, as the power is normally turned on or the power failure is resolved, the state of the payout control board 103 is returned to the state before the power was shut down based on the information in the backup area 513a.

Writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the power-off processing in the payout control board 103, and each value written in the backup area 513a is restored when the power is turned on. Control start processing). As the backup area 513a, as in the case of the main board 102, an RWM (external RWM) externally attached to the CPU 511 and connected to a backup power source can be used.

The main board 102 described above is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 for monitoring power interruption due to the above-described power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs a power failure signal (power failure signal) to the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. More specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 monitors the voltage of DC stable (for example, 30 V) which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541 of the power supply board 251, and the voltage becomes less than the predetermined voltage. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure (power interruption) is detected and the above-mentioned power interruption signal is output. Based on the input of such a power interruption signal, the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 execute a predetermined power interruption process.

It should be noted that the electrical characteristics of the main board 102 and the like are such that, even after the DC stable voltage becomes lower than a predetermined voltage at which the power cutoff signal is output, a sufficient time is required to execute a predetermined process such as a power-off process. During this period, the output of the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, is maintained at a normal value.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103. However, without being limited to this, for example, the output of the power supply board may be supplied to the payout control board 103 via the main board 102, or may be separately supplied to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 in different systems. You may do it.

Further, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 described above can be arranged in a portion other than the main board 102. For example, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be formed on the power supply board 251, and the power failure signal may be input from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to each board on the power supply board 251. It is also possible to omit the input of the power interruption signal from the main board 102 to the payout control board 103. Further, the function of the power supply board 251 may be allowed to be exhibited by the main board 102. In this case, it is conceivable to form the power supply unit 541 on the main board 102.

Further, the power outage monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided on the payout control board 103, and each of the payout control board 103 and the main board 102 may output an electric power interruption signal and perform a power interruption process based on the electric power interruption signal. Further, of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, only the payout control board 103 may be provided with the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 so that the power interruption signal is transmitted from the payout control board 103 to the main board 102.

Here, the above-mentioned main CPU 501, payout CPU 511, etc. are provided with NMI (non-maskable interrupt) terminals. In addition, as a trigger for executing the above-described power-off process, a hardware-like one that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) based on the input of a power-off signal indicating a voltage drop to the NMI terminal of the main CPU, and a timer. There is software-like one that checks the power-off flag set when a voltage drop is detected in the periodic interrupt processing based on the setting.

In the present embodiment, the power-off process is performed based on the hardware-like trigger of NMI. Then, the signal input to the NMI terminal can be performed, for example, by inputting the power interruption signal from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to the NMI terminal. Here, the signal input to the NMI terminal may occur not only when the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs the power interruption signal but also when noise is mixed into the signal line connected to the NMI terminal. It should be noted that the transition to the power-off processing can be performed based on a software method as described later as another embodiment. It is also possible to set a power-off flag based on the power-off signal input to the NMI terminal and use it as a trigger for executing the power-off process. In addition, although the main substrate 102 and the payout control substrate 103 perform the data backup here, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sub-main substrate 301 may perform the data backup of the storage area, and the sub-main substrate 301 It is also possible to perform data backup similarly to the board 102 or the payout control board 103.

Next, basic functions of the main board 102 will be described. The main board 102 of the present embodiment fulfills various functions such as entry determination, lottery, command transmission, etc. by the functions of the above-described configurations (see FIG. 4).

FIG. 6 shows typical functional means in each of the main substrate 102, the sub-main substrate 301, and the sub-sub substrate 302. Of these, the main board 102, the entrance determination means 110, the first lottery means 111, the second lottery means 112, the universal figure lottery means 113, the hold control means 114, the main display control means 115, the special game control means 116, It is provided with a specific game control means 117, an opening/closing control means 118, an advance information notification means 119, a main command transmission means 120, and the like. Then, the main board 102, by these functional means, as will be described in order below, lottery for special symbols, lottery for normal symbols, hold control, main control display, special game, specific game, opening/closing control, advance information. Execute notification etc.

The above-mentioned winning determination means 110 is a sensor provided at each winning opening to enter a game ball into each winning opening (actuation opening, various starting winning openings, big winning opening, general winning opening, out opening, etc.) It judges based on the signal output from.
<<Successful lottery function for special symbols>>

The above-mentioned first lottery means 111 executes the first lottery based on the entry into the first starting winning opening 62. The first lottery means 111 has the functions of a first lottery value acquisition means 121, a first winning/disagreement determination means 122, a first symbol determination means 123, and a first pattern determination means 124. The result of the first lottery is represented by the first special symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display portion 70 of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7) described above.

Similarly, the above-mentioned second lottery means 112 executes the second lottery based on the entry into the second starting winning opening 63. The second lottery means 112 has the functions of a second lottery value acquisition means 125, a second winning/disagreement judging means 126, a second symbol determining means 127, and a second pattern determining means 128. The result of the second lottery is represented by the second special symbol stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display portion 71 of the main control display device 53 described above.

The first lottery value acquisition means 121 provided in the above-mentioned first lottery means 111 sets the value of the big hit random number related to the first lottery to the first winning/winning lottery value upon the entry into the first starting winning opening 62. To get as. In addition, the second lottery value acquisition means 125 provided in the second lottery means 112 described above causes the value of the big hit random number related to the second lottery to be the second winning/losing result when the player enters the second starting winning opening 63. Obtain as a lottery value.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number acquired as the first win/win lottery value and the jackpot random number acquired as the second win/win lottery value are hardware random numbers (hard random numbers) and software random numbers (soft random numbers). It is generated by the calculation (addition) used. A built-in random number generated by, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit is used as the hardware random number, and a value updated at each interrupt by a random number generation program in software is used as the software random number. Note that either one of the hardware random number and the software random number may be used.

The first win/loss determination means 122 in the first lottery means 111 makes a win/fail determination based on the first win/win lottery value, and whether or not the first win/win lottery value corresponds to a predetermined value (hit value) for winning. To judge. Similarly, the second win/loss determination means 126 in the second lottery means 112 performs win/loss determination based on the above-mentioned second win/loss lottery value, and the second win/loss lottery value becomes a predetermined value (winning value) that is a win. Determine whether it is applicable. In the hit determination by the first hit determination means 122 and the second hit determination means 126, a hit determination table that defines the correspondence between the first hit lottery value and the second hit lottery value and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery (for example, FIG. a)) is used. Here, the normal time probability variation big jackpot shown in FIG. 9A indicates a random number value range which is always a big hit, and the probability variation big jackpot is a random number value range which is a big hit only when the probability variation occurs. It is shown that.

The first symbol determination means 123 in the first lottery means 111 and the second symbol determination means 127 in the second lottery means 112, in the case of winning one of the big hits in the jackpot lottery related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol , The type of special symbol is determined based on the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 10). The jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery defines the relationship between the symbol lottery value, which is a random number value (symbol random number) related to symbol determination, and the type of special symbol.

Here, the symbol lottery value may also be referred to as a “special symbol per symbol random number” or a “symbol random number” related to the special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, the type of winning includes a small hit, the first symbol determining means 123 and the second symbol determining means 127, in the case of winning the small hit in the big hit lottery related to the special symbol, special The type of symbol is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 10C).

The symbol lottery value is acquired upon the entry of a ball into the starting winning opening as in the case of the above-mentioned winning/winning lottery value. Further, the type of special symbol is associated with the type of winning, and the type of big hit and the presence/absence of small hit are determined in association with the obtained symbol lottery value.

The first pattern determination means 124 in the first lottery means 111 and the second pattern determination means 128 in the second lottery means 112, the variation pattern of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion corresponding to each, based on the special symbol variation pattern table decide. The special figure fluctuation pattern table defines a relationship between a large number of special figure fluctuation patterns and a pattern lottery value that is a random number value (fluctuation pattern random number) relating to the fluctuation pattern determination of the special symbol.

The pattern lottery value is acquired in the same manner as the above-mentioned winning/discarding lottery value when the start winning a prize is entered. Furthermore, the variation patterns relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are, for example, according to various game situations such as a big hit, an out-of-court time, the presence/absence of a reach, the presence/absence of time saving, the number of holdings, the number of variations after the big hit, A plurality of different special figure fluctuation pattern tables are provided.

The variation pattern related to the special symbol (special symbol variation pattern) defines the time (variation time) from the variation start to the variation stop in the variation display of the special symbol. Further, the special figure fluctuation pattern defines various long and short fluctuation times depending on the type, for example, from 1 second or less to several tens of seconds. That is, in each special figure variation pattern, the variation time is set as the ending condition of the variation display, and in the above-described first special symbol display section 70 or second special symbol display section 71 (see FIG. 7), The variable display of the symbol is started, and when the specified variation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

For many of the special figure variation patterns that are selected when the time is short, the variation time is set shorter than the special figure variation patterns that are selected when the time is not short. However, the special figure fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of holdings is four in a non-time saving time include those having a shorter fluctuation time than the specific special figure fluctuation pattern during the time saving. There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, most of the fluctuation patterns selected in a predetermined situation such as a probability change have an extremely short fluctuation time (for example, about 0.6 seconds). Then, in such a situation, based on the variation pattern of the extremely short time, the variation display of the special symbol and the accompanying effect are executed.
<<Relationship between random numbers related to special symbols and set values>>

Next, the relationship between the winning/discarding random numbers related to the special symbol and the set value will be described. FIG. 9A shows the winning/discarding random numbers for the setting value “1” of the setting values “1” to “6” in this embodiment. Regarding the winning/discarding random number table of the setting value “1” shown in FIG. 9A, the jackpot value at the time of normal (probability) in the random number value range “0 to 65535” in both the first lottery and the second lottery. Is "0 to 205". Furthermore, in normal times, the random number range “206 to 64875” is an outlier in both the first lottery and the second lottery.

On the other hand, at a high probability (at the time of probability change), “206 to 615” are the jackpot values in both the first lottery and the second lottery. Further, in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random number value range “616 to 64875” is a deviation value in both the normal time and the probability change time. Further, in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random number value range “64876 to 65535” is a small hit value both in the normal time and the probability change time.

FIG. 12 shows a list of hit values for each set value. As for the set value "1" among these, as shown in FIG. 9A, "0 to 205" is the jackpot value in the normal time. Therefore, the number of random number values is 206, and the jackpot probability in normal times is 1/318 (≈206/65536). On the other hand, with respect to the set value “2”, the jackpot value in the normal time is set to “0 to 206”. Therefore, the number of random number values is 207, and the jackpot probability in the normal time is 1/317 (≈207/65536).

Further, with respect to the set value “3”, the jackpot value in the normal time is “0 to 207”. The number of random number values is 208, and the jackpot probability in normal times is 1/315 (≈208/65536). With respect to the set value "4", the jackpot value in the normal time is "0 to 208". The number of random number values is 209, and the jackpot probability in normal times is 1/314 (≈209/65536).

Further, with respect to the set value “5”, the jackpot value in the normal time is “0 to 209”. The number of random number values is 210, and the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/312 (≈208/65536). Regarding the set value "6", the jackpot value in the normal time is "0 to 210". Then, the number of random number values is 211, and the jackpot probability in the normal time is 1/311 (≈211/65536). In this way, the jackpot value range is determined such that the jackpot probability increases as the set value increases.

In the case of high probability, the jackpot value is "0 to 615" for the set value "1", and the jackpot probability is 1/106. For the set values “2” to “6”, the jackpot value is “0 to 618”, “0 to 621”, “0 to 624”, “0 to 627”, and “0 to 630” in order. The approximate jackpot probability is “1/106”, “1/105”, “1/105”, “1/104”, and “1/104” in that order.

Here, the reason why the approximate jackpot probability includes the same value such as "1/105" or "1/104" is that the jackpot probability is expressed by rounding the decimal points. In the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value is determined such that the larger the set value is, the higher the big hit probability is. In addition, the probability ratio between the low probability and the high probability is “3 times” for all the set values, which is common.

Regarding the small hit, the random value range is “64876 to 65535” regardless of the set value in both the normal time and the high probability time. Therefore, the probability of small hits is 1/99 in all cases regardless of the probability state and the set value. Further, in the example of FIG. 12, the design value of the payout rate is 97%, 98%, 99%, 100%, 101%, 102% for the set values "1" to "6", respectively.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 9A and FIG. 12, the minimum value “0” in the numerical range is set as the big hit value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “0” may be excluded from the big hit value. By doing so, for example, it is possible to prevent fraud in case of fraudulently making the random number value of win/loss updated by power reset or the like to be the minimum value. Furthermore, it is possible not to assign "0" to the small hit, and not to assign the maximum value (here, "65535") to the big hit or the small hit.

In addition, in the present embodiment, pre-determination (so-called pre-reading) is performed on the winning/discarding lottery result performed using the winning/discarding random numbers shown in FIG. 9A and FIG. It will be described later based on (a) and (b).
<<Various lottery functions related to ordinary symbols>>

Next, the above-mentioned general drawing lottery means 113 will be described. The universal figure lottery means 113 has a universal figure lottery value acquisition means 129, a universal figure appropriateness determination means 130, a universal symbol determination means 131, and a universal figure pattern determination means 132. Then, the ordinary figure lottery means 113 executes the lottery (general figure lottery) relating to the normal symbol based on the detection result when the passage of the game ball at the actuation port 68 is detected by the above-described ball entry determination means 110. To do.

In this public figure lottery, the public figure lottery value acquisition means 129 acquires the public figure lottery value which is a random number (normal figure random number) relating to the ordinary symbol, and the public figure determination table 131 makes the public figure determination table. Referenced. In this universal figure determination table, the corresponding relationship between the universal figure lottery value and the type of ordinary symbol is defined. Then, the universal figure appropriateness determination means 130 determines whether or not the ordinary symbol associated with the universal figure lottery value corresponds to a hit, and if it hits, determines the type of a hit. To be done.

In addition, the universal figure pattern lottery value is acquired upon entering the actuating port 68, and the variation pattern (normal figure variation pattern) related to the ordinary symbol is obtained by the universal figure pattern determining means 132 using the acquired universal figure pattern lottery value. ) Is determined. Each public figure fluctuation pattern is associated with a public figure pattern lottery value, which is a random number related to the public figure fluctuation pattern (public figure fluctuation pattern random number), and is linked to the acquired public figure pattern lottery value to determine the game situation. The universal pattern variation pattern is set according to.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the universal figure lottery value, which is a random number related to a normal symbol, and the universal figure pattern lottery value are created using only software random numbers.
<<Functions for holding special symbols>>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned hold control means 114 will be described. The hold control means 114 has a first hold means 133, a second hold means 134, and a universal figure hold means 135. Of these, the first holding means 133, if there is a new ball to the first start winning port 62, if the predetermined variation start condition related to the first special symbol is not satisfied, it is acquired by the ball Information (first special figure reservation storage information) relating to various random numbers (first win/loss lottery value, first symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily stored. In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the reservation related to the first special symbol is set to four, and the reservation related to the first special symbol is possible within the range not exceeding this upper limit value.

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been executed when there is the above-mentioned ball is ended, and further, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has occurred before the above-mentioned ball is entered. If there is no hold related to, the fluctuation start condition related to the first special symbol is satisfied, and a new symbol fluctuation related to the first special symbol will be permitted.

Regarding the above-mentioned second holding means 134 as well, when there is a new ball entering the second starting winning opening 63, if the predetermined fluctuation start condition relating to the second special symbol is not satisfied, it is acquired by entering the ball. Information relating to various random numbers (second win/win lottery value, second symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily stored.

When the variable display of the second special symbol that has been executed when there is the above-mentioned entry is finished, the variation start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied, and a new symbol variation for the second special symbol Will be allowed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the reservation related to the second special symbol is set to four similarly to the first special symbol.

The above-mentioned first special symbol, and the second special symbol, when the symbol for starting the special game is stopped and controlled to the special game, the variation start condition is determined after the special game ends.
<<Functions for holding normal symbols>>

Next, the above-mentioned universal figure holding means 135 will be described. The universal figure holding means 135, when there is a ball in the operating port 68 (see FIG. 1), if the predetermined fluctuation start condition relating to the ordinary symbol is not satisfied, the random number acquired by the ball (the universal figure lottery) Information related to values, etc. (universal figure hold storage information) is temporarily held and stored. Then, until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the above-described normal symbol relating to the ball entry is not permitted. In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the normal symbol is set to four, and the hold related to the normal symbol can be held within a range not exceeding the upper limit value.

The variation display of the ordinary symbol that was being executed when there was a ball entered above is terminated, and the ordinary electric accessory is not operating, the variation start condition for the ordinary symbol is satisfied, and the new symbol for the ordinary symbol is established. Various symbol variations will be allowed.
<<Main control display function>>

Next, the above-mentioned main display control means 115 will be described. The main display control means 115 has a first special figure control means 136, a second special figure control means 137, a general figure control means 138, a hold display control means 139, and other display control means 140. Of these, the first special symbol control means 136, according to the variation pattern of the first special symbol determined by the first lottery means 111, the first special symbol display unit 70 (see FIG. 7), the variation of the first special symbol A display (for example, a blinking display in which a predetermined part of the LED indicator lights blinks every 100 msec) is performed. Then, the first special symbol, when the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed, the first special symbol display unit 70, stop display with the determined symbol.

Further, the second special symbol control means 137, according to the variation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112, if the variation start condition for the above-mentioned second special symbol is satisfied, the second special symbol display portion 71 ( (See FIG. 7), the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Then, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the determined symbol in the second special symbol display portion 71 when the variation time set by the variation pattern elapses.

Further, the universal symbol control means 138 follows the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol determined by the universal symbol lottery means 113 if the variation start condition relating to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is satisfied, and the ordinary symbol display portion 59 (see FIG. 7). ), the variable display of the normal pattern is performed. Furthermore, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed with the determined symbol in the normal symbol display portion 59 when the variation time determined by the variation pattern elapses.

Further, the hold display control means 139 displays the number of holdings related to the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, and normal symbol. Then, the display of these reserved numbers is performed by the first special symbol storage display unit 83, the second special symbol storage display unit 84, and the normal symbol storage display unit 85 of the main control display device 53 shown in FIG. Be seen. Further, the other display control means 140 described above controls the display on the main control display device 53 other than the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol, and various hold displays.
<<Special game functions>>

Next, the special game control means 116 will be described. The special game control means 116 determines that the special game operating condition is satisfied when the special symbol is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode when the big hit is hit, and the predetermined according to the kind of big hit as described above. A special game to be opened is executed in a mode (a predetermined number of times of a unit game or an opening pattern of a special winning opening during a unit game).
<<Functions related to specific games>>

Next, the specific game control means 117 will be described. The specific game control means 117 performs control relating to the above-mentioned probability change and time reduction. The specific game control means 117 shifts the game state after the end of the special game to the probability changing state, the time saving state, or the like according to the type of big hit. The probability variation state is attached to some types of jackpots instead of all types of jackpots. Furthermore, the probability variation state continues for some big hits until the next big hit, and for the other big hits with probability variation, it continues until the total variation display count after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). .. During the probability variation state, the winning probability of the big hit by the first lottery means 111 and the second lottery means 112 is maintained at a value higher than the normal time which is the non-probability variation time.

Further, the time saving state is continued until the total of the variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined end condition number (for example, 100 times) counted from the end point of the special game. Further, during the time saving, the first pattern determining means 124 and the second pattern determining means 128 are the time saving variation patterns so that the variation display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generally shorter than the normal state. Select.

Further, as described above, the game for facilitating entry of the ball is executed at the time when the time saving is executed as the specific game, the operation of the ordinary electric auditors is facilitated, and the game is arranged at the entrance of the second starting winning opening. Opening and closing blades are easier to open. The opening/closing control of the opening/closing blades is controlled by the opening/closing control unit 118 described later.
<<Functions related to opening/closing control>>

Next, the opening/closing control means 118 will be described. The opening/closing control unit 118 controls the opening/closing operation of the ordinary electric winning accessories (opening/closing blades) of the second starting winning opening 63 and the special winning opening device 90. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the opening/closing control means 118 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric prize solenoid 76 to open the normal electric prize of the second start winning port 63. Further, the opening/closing control means 118 performs control for sending an opening instruction to the special winning opening (open) solenoid 80 in the special game, and opens the special winning opening device 90.
<<Functions related to advance information notification>>

Next, the above-mentioned advance information notifying means 119 will be described. The advance information notifying means 119 is acquired when the first start winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63 is hit, regardless of whether or not the symbol variable display corresponding to the winning is suspended. A process for transmitting information related to the various random number values to the sub-board (here, the sub-main board 301) as advance notification information is performed.

As the advance notification information described above, each of the above-mentioned winning/unwinning lottery values (first winning/unwinning lottery value or second winning/winning lottery value), each symbol lottery value (first symbol lottery value or second symbol lottery value), each pattern The lottery value (the first pattern lottery value or the second pattern lottery value) can be exemplified by information such as what kind of win/loss range, symbol range, and pattern range it belongs to.

It should be noted that by transmitting such advance notification information, various prefetching effects can be performed on the sub-board 104 side. Further, as the prefetching effect, a pending notice, a continuous notice, and the like can be exemplified, and details thereof will be described later.
<<Functions related to command transmission>>

Next, the above-mentioned main command transmitting means 120 will be described. The main command transmitting unit 120 transmits a command (main command) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. The command transmission from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 is performed at various timings such as at the time of winning a start, when the variation of the special symbol is started, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and when the big hit occurs, including various information. ..
<Basic function of sub-board>

Next, the basic function of the above-described sub-board 104 will be described. In the present embodiment, the sub-board 104 includes a sub-main board 301 and a sub-sub-board 302, and performs various functions such as command reception from the main board 102, effect pattern determination, effect display control, and effect execution.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-main board 301 has a main command receiving means 141, an effect pattern determining means 142, a sub-main command transmitting means 143, and the like. Further, the sub-main board 301 is provided with functional means such as sound control means 144 for controlling speaker output and the like, and light control means 145 for controlling game effect lamp output and the like.

The effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination means 142 includes the display effect displayed on the effect display device 60 and the information for specifying the sound effect and the light effect that are performed together with the display effect as necessary. During the variable display of the design 190, an effect that suggests a high expectation of a big hit is executed. Here, the “expectation degree” in this embodiment can be restated as “reliability”. As for the "expectation degree", the description will be made about the production stage (normal pattern, chance-up pattern, confirmed pattern) that enhances the expectation of being a big hit due to variations in appearance of the same type of preliminary production, or one production. Of the probability that the hit variation pattern is included in the variation patterns corresponding to one effect when the hit variation pattern information (variation pattern in the hit variation) and the deviation variation pattern information (variation pattern in the deviation variation) that generate There is a case where each description is used, and in general, "a production with a high degree of expectation" means a production that often gives a big hit when the production occurs.

When the effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determination unit 142, effect pattern information indicating the determined effect pattern is transmitted to the sub-sub substrate 302 as a sub-main command via the sub-main command transmission unit 143. The command transmitted from the sub main board 301 to the sub sub board 302 also includes sound information in order to read sound data, lamp data, etc. from the ROM of the sub sub board.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-sub substrate 302 is provided with sub-main command receiving means 146, effect execution control means 147, and the like. Then, in the sub-sub-board 302, the effect execution control means 147 sequentially outputs the necessary image data to the liquid crystal unit 42 (see FIG. 4) based on the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301 to form an animation image. Then, the effect display device 60 displays a moving image for effect.
<Example of specific mode relating to specific game>

Next, a specific mode of the specific game described above will be described. As a specific game as described above, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (probability change), the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol (time saving), and the easy entry game (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, shortening the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol) Function, the combination of the function of extending the opening of ordinary electric accessories) is provided. Then, at least one of these various specific games is executed according to the result of the big hit lottery (stop display symbol of the special symbol) and the game result during the big hit. In the present embodiment, the specification that the probability variation period continues until the next big hit is adopted for some big hits instead of the so-called ST machine described above, but a specific mode thereof will be described later.
<<Probability fluctuation game>>

The above probability change is to change the probability state of the game relating to the special symbol after the big hit so that the occurrence probability of the big hit is higher than that of the normal probability state. In the pachinko game machine that employs ST, the continuation period (probability variation period) of the probability variation state is determined based on the number of variations of the special symbol.

The number of times of change of the special symbol is determined as once from the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display. Then, in ST, the probability variation period is set such that the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game is set to a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). The function that allows the probability variation period to end before the next big hit occurs in this way can be referred to as ST or the number-of-times probability variation.
<<Variable time reduction game>>

The above-mentioned time saving is to shorten the variation time of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) in the main control display device 53, as compared with the case of the normal game, in general. Here, "generally shortened" does not always shorten than the normal game in all cases, and in some cases, when the variation time of the special symbol is equivalent to the normal game or longer than the normal game. Is meant to be included. Then, according to this time saving, since the variation time of the special symbol becomes short, even if the winnings to the starting winning a prize openings (the first starting winning a prize opening 62 and the second starting award winning entrance 63) occur continuously, The variable display and stop display of the symbols can be smoothly advanced at short intervals, and it is possible to secure many opportunities for the big hit lottery.

Further, the continuation period of the time saving state (time saving period) is determined based on the number of times of change of the special symbol, similarly to the probability changing state. Then, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is continued until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).

In the above example, the probability variation period and the short-term period are set to the same period, but the probability variation period and the short-term period may be different periods. For example, it is possible to set the probability variation period to 104 times and the time saving period to 100 times. Further, the probability variation period and the shortening period are not limited to being constant. For example, the probability variation period can be set to any of 4, 25, 100 times or the like depending on the type of big hit that has occurred. In addition, it is possible to set the time saving period to any of 25 times, 50 times, 75 times, 100 times, etc. depending on the type of big hit that has occurred.

Further, it is possible to provide a so-called falling lottery function. Examples of the falling lottery include the following. For example, after a certain number of changes (for example, 50 times) that are less than the maximum number of changes (here, 100 times), the probability change or the shortening time, each time the special symbol changes until the maximum number of changes is reached, A lottery (specific game end lottery) is executed to determine whether to end the probability change or the time saving. When the specific game end lottery is won, the certainty change and the time saving are ended, and the game state from the next change returns to the normal state without the certainty change and the time saving.

Furthermore, it is possible to execute only one of the specific games in addition to executing both the probability change and the time saving. For example, depending on the type of the jackpot that was won, it is possible to provide only the shortening and not the probability variation, or to not provide the shortening and only the probability variation.
<<Easy entry game>>

Next, the above-mentioned game for facilitating entry into a ball will be described. In this game for facilitating entry of balls, the function related to the ordinary electric accessory is set to the advantage of the player, and the opening state of the second starting winning port 63 can make it easier to accept the game balls than usual. is there. When the game for facilitating entry of a ball is executed, a control mode such as a time saving related to a normal symbol, a probability variation related to a normal symbol, an extension extension related to a normal electric accessory, or a combination of these control modes, a second Ease of entering the starting winning opening 63 is enhanced, and an easy-to-enter state is formed. In connection with this "easy to enter game" and the above-mentioned "base", "electric support", etc., in the following, "high base", "high base state", "low base", "low base state", " Terms such as "non-electric support" are used. In the following, the “low base state” corresponds to the “non-electric support state”, and the “high base state” corresponds to the “electric support state”.

Of the above-mentioned various control modes in the ordinary symbol, the time saving related to the ordinary symbol is a control mode in which the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability variation related to the ordinary symbol is the winning probability of the ordinary symbol. Is a control mode for improving the normal state (probability change related to the normal symbol). Further, the extension of the opening related to the ordinary electric accessory is a control mode in which the opening time of the second starting winning opening 63 is longer (long opening) than the opening (short opening) in normal time (non-specific game). is there.

As described above, the easy-to-enter game during the specific game is to enter the second start winning port 63 using the three functions of the time saving of the normal symbol, the probability variation of the open lottery, and the extension of the opening of the ordinary electric auditors. Improves ball ease. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one or two of these three functions may be used to increase the ease of entering the second starting winning opening 63. Further, at least one of the three functions may be switched between a period in which it is implemented and a period in which it is not implemented according to the gaming state.

The duration of such an easy-to-enter game can be determined based on the short-term time period associated with the special symbol. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the entry facilitation game is continued during the time saving relating to the special symbol, and the entry facilitation game is terminated when the time saving relating to the special symbol ends. And in this case, the variation pattern of the normal symbol (general symbol variation pattern) in which the symbol variation starts after the special symbol time saving is finished is provided for the normal time (at the time of non-specific game) It is possible to make a decision based on the fluctuation pattern.
<Main production on Pachinko machines>
<<Basic display mode of production design>>

Next, the main ones of various effects executed by the sub-main substrate 301 and the sub-sub substrate 302 based on commands from the main substrate 102 to the sub-main substrate 301 will be described. Then, here, first, a basic display mode of the above-described effect design 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B) will be described.

The effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 as the special symbol is variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 8A). Further, the effect symbol 190 is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8B) along with the special symbol being stopped and displayed on the main control display device 53.

The stop symbol displayed along with the stop of the effect symbol 190 is composed of a combination of three symbols, a left effect symbol 190a, a middle effect symbol 190b, and a right effect symbol 190c. And when the result of the big hit lottery on the main board 102 is a big hit, a combination of squares having three symbols such as "777" and "555" is a stop symbol representing the big hit. Is displayed. If the result of the big hit lottery is out of alignment, for example, in a combination such as "767", "928", "331" or the like, a combination of one or all of the effect symbols is different from the other effect symbols. The design 190 is stopped and displayed.

Here, "stop symbol" and "stop symbol" in this embodiment mean that the three effect symbols 190 are "fixed stop". That is, even if the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 in a state where the combinations such as "767" and "928" are maintained, only that is "determined stop". It does not correspond to what you have done. Then, the state in which the effect design 190 does not reach the “fixed stop” while maintaining the combination in this way can be referred to as a “temporary stop” state.

As a display mode of such a "temporary stop", for example, a state in which the effect design 190 is oscillating (shaking) in small steps can be exemplified. The mode of temporary stop in which the effect design 190 is swaying in small steps while maintaining the combination can be referred to as a “sway variation” mode. Examples of the manner of shaking of the effect design 190 in this “temporary stop” include vertical or horizontal linear movement and horizontal rotational movement, and the movement range can be several millimeters.

In addition, as a display mode of the above-mentioned “fixed stop”, a state in which all the effect symbols 190a to 190c are stopped while maintaining the combination after the state of temporary stop can be exemplified. Furthermore, at the time of this “fixed stop”, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the fixed stop has been made. Then, as an effect indicating that the fixed display is performed, the fixed stop state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second), or the fixedly stopped effect symbols 190a to 190c are added with a special effect. It is possible to exemplify displaying with (pattern effect), lighting an LED (lamp) provided in the center decoration 64, and the like.

Here, as the symbol effect, each of the effect symbols 190a to 190c is momentarily (for example, about 0.5 seconds) shining, and a bright spot is orbited around each of the effect symbols 190a to 190c once or a plurality of times. It is possible to employ various modes such as enlarging or reducing the symbols 190a to 190c, moving the effect symbols 190a to 190c by several millimeters and returning to the original position.

In addition, in the display mode of "reach" described above, the effect symbol that maintains the combination of reach may be displayed in the mode of "temporary stop" described above. Then, after the reach display by the "temporary stop", the symbols that have been variably displayed (here, the medium effect design 190b) constitute a combination of the deviation (a combination of the deviation reach), "temporarily stop", and the combination is set. It is possible to exemplify an effect in which “fixed stop” is performed while keeping the variable display and the variable display is ended. Further, from the state in which the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are "temporarily stopped" due to the combination of the outlying reach, the middle effect symbol 190b resumes the fluctuation and the reach effect has a high reliability (reliability related to a big hit. The production (reach in the second half), which develops to a relatively high degree, can be illustrated.

It should be noted that the scroll display mode of the effect design 190 is not limited to the vertical scroll described above, and various display modes can be adopted. Then, as another display mode, for example, a horizontal scroll mode in a horizontal direction (from right to left, etc.) or a left effect design 190a to a right effect design 190c are individually rotated (rotated) around the vertical axis. A rotation mode for performing variable display can be exemplified. Further, for example, the left effect design 190a to the right effect design 190c are enlarged in the display area 194 from the rear to the front, that is, from the back of the screen toward the front, along the linear or curved (turn) orbit. It is also possible to exemplify a display mode in which the display is sequentially performed. Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a mode of scroll display in which the effect symbol that goes from the rear to the front comes down from the upper side to the lower side.

Further, the scroll mode is not limited to the adoption of any one of the various modes described above, and for example, when a predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined scroll mode is switched to another scroll mode. It is also possible. In addition, it is possible to change the scroll mode for each of the plurality of effect modes.

8(a) and 8(b) show a display mode in which the combination of effect symbols 190 is stopped and displayed only in the vertical middle part of the display area 194, and the effective line is in the horizontal direction. There is only one line. However, the number of effective lines is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set the number of effective lines to two or five, for example.

Further, in FIG. 8(b), the left effect design 190a to the right effect design 190c are simplified and shown only by the numbers in a predetermined font, but the effect design 190 is as illustrated in FIG. 33(b). In, a combination of a part that means a predetermined symbol such as a number (an element design that is the above-mentioned symbol element production design) and a part that consists of a pattern other than the predetermined symbol (an element design that is a non-symbol element production design) It can be configured by. And as the portion consisting of a pattern other than a predetermined symbol, various design images and portraits, and combinations thereof can be exemplified, and further, various design images and portraits combined with symbols can be animated. It is also possible to In the example of FIG. 33B, a heart pattern is adopted as a pattern other than a predetermined symbol.
<<Example of production pattern>>

Next, the above-mentioned effect pattern will be described. A large number of effect patterns are provided in a state associated with the variation pattern determined on the main board 102. Further, the production pattern including the production design 190 is defined in the production pattern. More specifically, in the production pattern, a variation process from a variation start to a variation stop for the selected production design 190, a production process such as a background displayed in combination with the production design 190 and story development are defined. There is. Then, there are some production patterns corresponding to the above-mentioned "with reach" and "without reach".

Among these, when the production pattern of “with reach” is executed, the reach production which is a big hit if one more production symbol (here, the intermediate production symbol 190b) is prepared is performed on the production display device 60. Then, when the result of the win/no win lottery related to the special symbol is the big hit, the display of the squares such as “777” and “333” depending on the type of the big hit is performed by the effect design 190 which is definitely stopped. In addition, when the result of the win/no win lottery related to the special symbol is out of alignment, for example, a combination such as “767” or “515” indicating the outfall is performed by the fixed and stopped effect design 190.

Furthermore, when the production pattern of "no reach" is executed, a combination without reach such that the left production design 190a and the right production design 190c are not reach combinations, such as "928" and "331", It is performed by the effect design 190 which is definitely stopped.

Some of these effect patterns have various long and short fluctuation times, and in particular, the fluctuation pattern of “with reach” also includes a fluctuation time of several minutes. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variation pattern related to the special symbol described above (see FIGS. 11A to 11C), “no reach (about 3 seconds to 10 seconds)”, “normal reach (10 seconds to 20 seconds). Degree)”, “super reach (reach with high jackpot reliability) (about 30 seconds to 2 minutes)”, an effect pattern without reach, an effect pattern of normal reach, and an effect pattern of super reach are provided. Then, for these effect patterns, for example, a plurality of effect patterns are associated with one variation pattern, and the number of effect patterns is wider than the variation patterns described above. Further, "super reach" can be rephrased as "SP (special) reach".
<<Hold effect display related to special design>>

Next, the hold display (holding effect display) relating to the special symbol performed in the effect display device 60 will be described. In the lower part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, a first reservation number display section 196 showing the reservation number of the winning/winning lottery value in the first game, and The second hold number display portion 197 showing the hold number of the winning/winning lottery value in the two games is displayed. In addition, here, for simplification of description and illustration, each pending display is represented by a perfect circle, but the pending display may be performed by a combination of other shapes and colors, a character image, an animation, or the like.

In the present embodiment, when a hold related to the first game occurs, a predetermined hold display is displayed on the above-mentioned first hold number display unit 196. Further, when the number of holdings increases, a holding display is added. Then, when the number of holdings reaches the upper limit, four holdings are displayed on the first holding number display portion 196 as shown in FIG. 8A.

Further, the hold display on the first hold number display unit 196 can be performed from the first display position to the fourth display position. That is, the first hold number display unit 196 includes the first display position to the fourth display position, and the right end portion of the first hold number display unit 196 as viewed from the player is the first display position. Has become. Then, the second display position, the third display position, and the fourth display position are provided in order toward the left end. Further, in the following, the hold displays performed from the first display position to the fourth display position are referred to as "hold 1", "hold 2", "hold 3", and "hold 4", respectively.

For example, in the effect display device 60, the hold occurs while the effect design 190 relating to the first game is being performed, and in the situation where one hold display is not being performed on the first hold number display unit 196, either. Then, the hold display is performed at the first display position at the right end (the above-mentioned "hold 1" position). Further, at this time, it is assumed that no other hold display has been made yet, and "Hold 2" to "Hold 4" have not occurred. When the "hold 1" is generated in this manner and the hold is further generated, the display relating to the generated hold is performed at the position of "hold 2" on the left side of the "hold 1". Then, when "Hold 1" and "Hold 2" are displayed, and "Hold 3" and "Hold 4" are not displayed, when a further hold occurs, "Hold 3" is displayed according to the number of held holds. Or “Protect 4” is displayed.

Then, if the variable display that was being executed when "Hold 1" occurred was ended, and if other fluctuation start conditions related to the first game were also satisfied, the above-mentioned pending storage information relating to "Hold 1" At the stage of being consumed, the hold display of “Hold 1” moves to the right of the first hold number display portion 196. The variation information display unit 195 is provided on the right side of the first reserved number display unit 196. The variation information display unit 195 is an area for displaying information (variation information) relating to the variation display being executed at that time. That is, the hold display of “Hold 1” moves to the change information display unit 195 and changes to the change information display 198 when the change display related to the corresponding hold storage information is executed.

Here, when moving the hold display of "Hold 1" to the variation information display unit 195, display elements such as the size, color, and form of the item may be changed. In the example of FIGS. 8A and 8B, the size is enlarged when the hold display of “Hold 1” is changed to the variable information display 198.

As described above, when the hold display in “Hold 1” moves to the variable information display unit 195, the standby order of the subsequent hold display is moved up, and “Hold 2” is shifted to the position of “Hold 1”. Further, if "Hold 3" and "Hold 4" exist, "Hold 3" shifts to the "Hold 2" position, and "Hold 4" shifts to the "Hold 3" position. Then, in such a situation, if a further hold occurs, a new "hold 4" occurs, and the hold number reaches the upper limit. If no new hold occurs, the hold display is shifted with the start of the next variable display, and the waiting order of each hold is advanced.

It should be noted that it is possible, in a broad sense, to consider it as a holding effect, including a state in which the change display from "hold 1" to "hold 4" is changed to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195. The present invention is not limited to this, and handles such as "hold 1" to "hold 4" are displayed as hold, and the changed state of the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display. It is also possible.

Further, when the variable display related to the effect design 190 is not performed, and the number of holdings is 0 and there is a ball in the first starting winning opening 62, the display of "Hold 1" is not displayed (or is displayed momentarily. Then, the variation information display 198 is directly displayed on the variation information display unit 195. Only in such a case, it is possible to handle such that the variation information display 198 in the variation information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display.

Next, the above-mentioned second number-of-holds display unit 197 will be described, but the description of the same points as the first number-of-holds display unit 196 will be omitted. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the second holding number display section 197 is located on the opposite side of the first holding number display section 196 (on the right side when viewed from the player) with the above-mentioned variation information display section 195 interposed therebetween. ), a color different from that of the first reserved image is arranged so that the relations of "Hold 1" to "Hold 4" are symmetrical.

Further, with respect to the hold display, it is possible to perform the display according to various game states. For example, when the big hit lottery probability is the normal probability and the high probability, and the like, different hold display modes can be exemplified when the different production modes are controlled.

Furthermore, the positional relationship between the first number-of-holds display unit 196, the second number-of-holds display unit 197, and the variation information display unit 195 is not limited to the above-described one, and the second game is the second game as in the present embodiment. Rather than executing in priority to one game, the variation information display unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the type that performs variable display of special symbols and effect symbols 190 in the order of occurrence of the start winnings related to the first game and the second game. Eight reserved displays may be arranged on the left side of 195.
<< reserved look-ahead production related to special symbols >>

Next, the hold prefetching effect, which is one of the notice effects (prefetching effects) related to the special symbol, will be described. This hold-ahead read effect is an effect that is executed based on the hold storage information (first special figure hold storage information or second hold storage information) described above. Furthermore, the hold prefetching effect uses the function of the advance information notification described above, and a reach or a big hit occurs with respect to the hold being digested after the effect being performed using the effect design 190 or the like at that time. It is executed as a performance that suggests the expectation of doing.

For example, with respect to the hold display generated at the position of "hold 3" in the first hold number display unit 196, a green hold display is different from the display (for example, blue) which is the basic display mode in which the hold is not changed. By carrying out, it is shown that the degree of expectation of occurrence of reach and the like is higher than that in the case of a normal blue mode. In addition to the colors of blue and green, display modes such as yellow, red, gold, iridescent, and predetermined pattern are provided, and expectation of big hit in the order of yellow, red, gold, iridescent, and predetermined pattern rather than green. The production is performed to show that the degree is high.

Here, examples of the display mode of the above-mentioned "predetermined pattern" include an animal pattern such as a giraffe and a display mode including a predetermined character image. Further, it is possible to employ not only the color and pattern of the hold display, but also an item other than a perfect circle shape, a person image, or the like. Further, it is possible to perform the prefetching effect by combining the above-mentioned various display modes with the mode in which blinking or light emission is performed. In addition, the hold held in the pre-reading effect including the hold pre-reading effect can be referred to as, for example, “trigger hold”.

The prefetching effect related to the hold as described above may be performed in the second game as well. Then, with respect to the second game, it is possible to provide display modes such as red, gold, rainbow, and a predetermined pattern in addition to the basic color (orange). Also, as the hold display related to the second game, it is possible to adopt an item other than a perfect circle shape, a person image, or the like.

Further, the prefetch effect using the hold display in the first game and the second game as described above can be referred to as “hold change”. In addition, such "holding change" includes a display mode different from the basic display mode as described above from the beginning of the hold generation, a display mode change at a timing after the hold generation, and the like. is there.

Among these, as a change in the display mode at a timing after the hold is generated, for example, a hold occurs and the hold display is started, the hold progresses, and the hold display indicates “hold 2”, It is possible to exemplify an example in which the hold display changes while proceeding to "hold 1". Then, for example, when the hold occurs, the hold display is displayed in blue (orange in the case of the second game) at the position of "Hold 3", and when moving to the position of "Hold 1", another color such as green. It changes to.

In addition, in both the first game and the second game, when the variation information display 198 is displayed, the hold display is changed from the basic color to a display mode such as red, gold, rainbow, or a predetermined pattern, or true. In some cases, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be represented by changing to a display mode such as an item other than a circular shape or a person image.

Furthermore, the following can be illustrated as a control aspect related to the above-mentioned hold change. For example, when a hold occurs, a lottery (hold change pattern lottery) for determining an effect pattern of a hold change (hold change pattern) is performed. A hold change pattern table is used for this hold change pattern lottery, and this hold change pattern table indicates the presence/absence of a hold change and, when executing a hold change (when there is a hold change), what timing In this case, matters relating to the determination of the effect pattern such as what kind of display mode is executed are defined. Further, as the pending change pattern, one for the first game and one for the second game are defined.

Further, when there are a plurality of holdings corresponding to the holding change in "holding 1" to "holding 4", it is possible to cancel one of the holding prefetching effects. More specifically, for example, when "Hold 4" occurs, the hold related to "Hold 4" hits the hold change pattern that changes to green, and any hold that has occurred earlier, If the hold change pattern that changes to a rainbow color is hit, the hold change related to the "hold 4" described above can be canceled and not executed.

Further, for example, when “Hold 4” occurs, as in the above example, the hold related to “Hold 4” hits the hold change pattern that changes to rainbow color, and all the hold that occurred earlier. However, as long as the iridescent color does not change and only the green color is held and changed, the holding change that has occurred first can be canceled and not executed. When performing the hold change, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests that the hold change will be performed (sometimes referred to as "hold change change effect"), and this point will be described later separately.
<<Continuous notice regarding special symbols>>

Next, as another look-ahead effect pattern, a continuous announcement (continuous effect) relating to a special symbol will be described. This continuous notice includes a genuine one and a pseudo one, and a genuine continuous notice among them means that a continuous notice effect is produced over a plurality of variable displays related to a special symbol. ing. In addition, the pseudo continuous notice means that for one variable display related to the special symbol, an intermittent notice effect (pseudo continuous notice) in which the special symbol has changed a plurality of times is performed.

As the above-mentioned "continuous notice", for example, the character who is the main character in the story in the production moves to different rooms one by one, aiming for the room that is the final goal, for each change of the special symbol. Such a thing can be illustrated. In addition, as the "serial notice" in another aspect, the character who is the main character, against each change of the special symbol, wins by fighting against a different enemy and aims at the enemy who is the final goal. Can also be illustrated.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned genuine continuous notice (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “continuous notice”) can be given based on the advance notice information transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. More specifically, for example, based on the advance notification information received when the "Hold 3" is held, the sub-main board 301 is used as an effect pattern corresponding to the variable display related to the special symbol after that. It is possible to select, for example, a content that includes continuous notice over three variable displays.

Then, when the one-time hold is exhausted and the above-mentioned “hold 3” hold is shifted to the “hold 2” position, the first one of the effect patterns related to the selected continuous notice is selected. The effect pattern related to the notice is executed. Further, when the hold is sequentially exhausted and the hold display moves from "Hold 2" to "Hold 1", the second notice of three times is executed, and the fluctuation information display is started from "Hold 1". When moving to the section 195, the final third notice is executed.

In the sub-main substrate 301, the change pattern relating to the change display being executed at the time when the above-mentioned “holding 3” is held or the “holding 2” or “holding 1” occurring before that is displayed. It is also possible to confirm the pending storage information. That is, when the above-mentioned "hold 3" is held, information indicating that a predetermined reach effect with high jackpot reliability is executed, or a jackpot is generated among various kinds of information already stored. If there is information indicating that the effect is to be performed, it is possible to cancel the effect pattern related to the continuous notice selected when the "hold 3" is held. In addition, according to the expectation of suspension for "Hou 3", continuous notice is not given immediately from the next change, and after waiting for 1 change, the change of "Hou 1" and the trigger hold 2 which is the prefetch mode It is also possible to give a continuous notice over fluctuations.

In addition, as the pseudo continuous announcement described above (hereinafter, may be referred to as “pseudo continuous announcement”), reach display is intermittently performed a plurality of times in the effect pattern relating to one variable display of the special symbol. Such a thing, a thing in which a character repeats an action a plurality of times, a thing in which the temporary stop and re-variation of the effect design 190 are repeated can be exemplified.

It should be noted that the content of the continuous announcement as described above is merely an example, and various content other than the content described above can be adopted as the content of the continuous announcement.
<< production design related to ordinary design >>

Next, the effect related to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect display related to the normal symbol is not performed. However, it is possible to perform the effect related to the normal symbol as a part of the effect on the effect display device 60. Then, in the case of performing the effect display of the ordinary symbol in this way, as the effect symbol, for example, it is conceivable to perform the display of such a degree that the deviance and the type of hit can be distinguished.

Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, it is provided with a relatively large display body and a display body (may be plural) smaller than this. It is possible. Then, the large display body can be referred to as, for example, a "main display body" or a "main liquid crystal", and the small display body can be referred to as, for example, a "sub display body" or a "sub liquid crystal". Furthermore, when a relatively small display body as described above is provided, the effect design (199) related to the normal design may be displayed on the small display body, for example. Further, for example, an LED display lamp having a set of two may be provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and this may be used as an effect display device related to a normal symbol.

Further, when performing the effect using the effect symbol related to the ordinary symbol, the hold effect display related to the ordinary symbol can be performed as a part of the effect in the effect display device 60. Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, the effect hold display related to the normal symbol is, for example, a small display. It may be displayed on the body. In addition, for example, an LED indicator light that is a set of two is provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and thereby, the effect display of the number of holdings related to the normal symbols of "1" to "4" is performed. Good.
<<Production related to limited frequency pattern>>

Next, an effect related to the limited frequency pattern (hereinafter, referred to as “limited frequency pattern effect”) will be described. The limited frequency pattern effect is provided as a part of the effect pattern described above. Further, the limited frequency pattern effect is an effect that is set so as to easily appear in a predetermined game state, corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the pattern determining means of the main board in a specific period. The content of this limited frequency pattern effect is an effect content showing a specific tendency, and as the content of the limited frequency pattern effect, for example, in a specific change during a time-saving game, a predetermined change pattern is displayed on the main board. It is possible to exemplify the one that is determined and that surely generates a highly reliable reach.

In addition, as a game situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, at the start of the game, immediately after the predetermined effect pattern is executed (for example, immediately after a small hit or no payout big hit), during a predetermined effect mode (probability change, The time saving game mode), immediately after the end of the special game, and the like can be exemplified. In addition to these, as a game situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, when the number of holdings related to the first game (or the second game) has reached a predetermined number (for example, four), or the holding is The case where it does not exist can be exemplified. Furthermore, in a situation where the limited frequency pattern effect is executed, a limited frequency table provided in advance according to the situation at that time is used, and the effect pattern to be executed is determined from the limited frequency patterns set in the limited frequency table. It is supposed to be selected.
<<<Direction using operation buttons>

Next, an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “button effect”) using the operation button 22 (see FIG. 1) described above will be described. The operation button 22 is pressed by the player when the button effect is executed, and has a function of giving the player the feeling that he or she is participating in the effect of the game or the lottery. is there. As the button effect, for example, in the variable display process of the effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B), in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, with the symbol of the operation button 22, “Push” and “continuous hit”. It is possible to exemplify that a guide display for prompting an operation is displayed, such as characters such as "Go", "Long press", or a moving image of an indicator showing the remaining time.

Further, as the button effect, when the player operates the operation button 22 according to the guide display described above, an effect in which the character makes a comment or an effect in which the teammate character attacks the enemy character can be exemplified. In addition, it is also possible to exemplify that the movable effect members (601 to 603, etc.) described above are activated when the operation button 22 is operated to notify that the reach is reached. Furthermore, a button effect may be performed during the reach effect, and in that case, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable effect members (601 to 603, etc.) are activated to fuel the expectation for a big hit. Can also be illustrated.

Further, regarding the above-described operation button 22, the operation of the operation button 22 is normally disabled, but during the button performance, the operation of the operation button 22 is enabled during the button operation valid period. The button operation effective period is a preset fixed time.

Note that various other types of operation input devices such as the operation button 22 can be adopted. For example, an operation handle of an automobile, an operation lever of an aircraft, a model of a character, which is related to the contents of the effect. A (figure) with a touch sensor can also be used. Further, it is possible to provide an operation button and an operation lever in the form of a device, and to use the operation button properly according to the situation such as effect contents.

Further, as described above, the cross key 96 (FIG. 21) is provided in the vicinity of the operation button 22, and the operation button 22 may be used as a decision key or the like in a situation where environment setting or the like is performed. Then, in the present embodiment, the effect operation using the operation button 22 and the cross key 96 is performed in a situation in which the effect display device 60 is performing variable display of the effect pattern 190 or the like, or in a situation in which the effect display is not being performed. It may be done.
<<Production when a big hit occurs>>

Next, an effect when a big hit occurs will be described. When the big hit occurs, the special game start effect (big hit start demo), special game effect (round effect), final round end effect (hit end demo), special game end There are productions (big hit end demo), etc. Here, the production of the above-mentioned big hit start demonstration is a production of a period in which the close of the attacker (special winning opening) is maintained from the start of the execution of the big hit game (special game) to the start of the execution of the first round (unit game). The production of the above-mentioned big hit end demo is for the period in which the closing of the attacker (big winning opening) is maintained from the end of the execution of the final round (unit game) to the end of the execution of the big hit game (special game). It can be said that it is a production.

When the above-mentioned effect design 190 is fixedly stopped, a display that the big hit is started is displayed along with a sound such as a fanfare. As the display that the big hit is started, the big hit start demonstration screen shown in FIG. 38A can be exemplified. Further, it is possible to exemplify a content in which a right-handing guide effect is executed as a hitting instruction during a special game, and the player is instructed to increase the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 to perform right-handing. Further, as the display of the content for guiding the player to make a right stroke, it is possible to display a message such as "Turn the handle to the right" in the right stroke guide display area 383 of FIG. 38(a).

Here, the effect contents at the start of the big hit may be different between the first hit (big hit on the low base) and the condominium (big hit on the high base). Specifically, it is possible to display "Big hit start!" etc. at the time of the first win and display "Big hit continuous!" etc. at the time of hitting the condominium. For right-handed guidance, the message "Turn the handle to the right" will be displayed in the first hit, but in Renso, such a message will not be displayed or a different display (simply "right-handed"). Large characters are displayed for a short time). In this way, the big hit start demonstration effect at the time of consecutive games may be shorter than the big hit start demonstration effect at the time of first hit, and in that case, of course, the big hit start demonstration time is shorter than that at the time of first hit. It becomes shorter at the time of continuous vacation. Similarly, the time value of the big hit end demonstration effect (big hit start demo time) may be shorter in the extended game than in the first hit. Also, regarding touch effects that can be performed during the big hit start demonstration described later, the contents of the effect and whether execution of the effect is permitted based on the number of times of the extended vacation or the case of first hit Can also be associated.

As an example of the above-mentioned effect during the special game, a moving image with contents that cannot be seen unless the player wins the big hit can be illustrated. At this time, a predetermined music piece is output from the above-mentioned speaker 21 (see FIG. 1). In addition, as the video during the special game, for example, a scene in which a predetermined character in a dramatic picture adopted for the production of the Pachinko game machine 10 fights against a rival enemy or a scene in which he or she enjoys a mockery is depicted. It is possible to exemplify the ones. Here, (FIG. 38(b)) exemplifies a scene of a video in which two women fight an enemy together as a video during a special game.

It should be noted that the switching of the rounds during the special game can be performed by, for example, “1R”, “2R”,..., “15R”, “1 round”, “2 round”,... It is possible to notify by such a display. Further, as a part of the effect during the special game, for example, it is possible to display the number of times of a big hit when a big hit occurs during a specific game and the big hits continue.

In the display example of FIG. 38( b ), in the lower part of the screen, a reservation number display area 367 is displayed which distinguishes the reservation numbers of special figure 1 and special figure 2. Further, similarly, in the display example of FIG. 38(b), a reduction effect symbol display area 361, a round number display area 368, and a count number display area 369 are displayed. Similarly, in the display example of FIG. 38(b), in the upper right part of the screen, the number of consecutive games related to the jackpot game and the number of consecutive villas are displayed by the display such as "First probability change" or "Number of acquisitions: 195". , The number of winning awards balls in the condominium is displayed.

Here, not only the prize balls by the game during the round (by entering the special winning opening (90)) are set as the display target of the number of winning prize balls, but the same launch position as the big winning opening (90) ( A prize ball based on a ball entering a general prize hole (reference numeral omitted) arranged in the firing direction may also be a display target of the number of acquired prize balls. In addition, when a so-called over-prize (exceeding the specified count in one round for the big winning opening), which is an extra prize, occurs, an effect that suggests or informs the occurrence (for example, " Sound output such as “Seed!” or a display such as “Nice!” in the effect display) may be performed.

Further, as the effect during the special game, for example, a specific effect (a specific effect during a hit) as shown in FIG. 38(c) and FIGS. 39(a) to (c) can be performed. In FIG. 38(c) and FIGS. 39(a) to (c), the hitting specific effect screens A to D are illustrated. These hitting specific effect screens A to D are displayed as an opportunity to change the story development, or inserted as a branch point of the effect when the number of rounds is notified or the promotion effect to the probability change is performed during the big hit game. It can be used for such purposes. Note that the meanings and contents of the display examples of FIGS. 38(c) and 39(a) to (c) will be described later.

Subsequently, as the above-mentioned effect after the special game, an example relating to the result of the effect contents during the special game can be exemplified. More specifically, it is possible to exemplify the content in which the winner expresses emotions according to the result of the fight between the characters. Such an effect after the special game can be called an ending effect.

Further, as the effect after the special game, an example in which the number of consecutive big hits is additionally displayed and a case in which the number of prize balls obtained by the player in the special game at that time are displayed can be exemplified. It is also possible to additionally display the number of times of a big hit when a big hit occurs during a specific game and the big hits continue. In addition, regarding the succession of big hits, when the number of occurrences of big hits reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute an effect pattern that is not selected before that.

FIG. 37(c) shows a screen display example at the time of the big hit end demonstration. At the time of this big hit end demonstration, a character such as "end" which indicates the end of the big hit game is displayed. Further, a lower message display area 364 is displayed in the lower part of the screen, and a message of "Transition to standby screen by touching handle, transition to customization screen by effect button ON (.)" is displayed in a flow. In this big hit end demo screen, it is also possible to display the number of winning prize balls during the big hit game or in the continuous vacation. In the example of FIG. 37(c), "big hit+1 time" and "acquired number: 1500" are displayed in the lower left part of the screen.

In addition, if the type of big hit includes big hits that do not involve a certainty change, do not notify whether or not there will be a certainty change after the end of the special game until during the special game or until the end of the special game. Is also possible.

For example, when a total of 10 rounds of special games are played, there is no effect that informs the player whether or not they are hitting a probability change until the end of the 8th round, and after the 8th round the probability change occurs. It is possible to employ an effect and a control mode in which the effect of that effect (specific effect during a hit) is performed over one or a plurality of rounds.

Similarly, in a pachinko game machine that includes a big hit without probability change, when a game ball is detected in a predetermined area at a predetermined timing such as before the special game starts, during the special game, or when the special game ends. It is also possible to adopt an effect or control mode in which the probability changes.

In this case, for example, a ball entrance device having a game ball detection area (referred to as “V ball entrance device” here) is added to a part of the game area 52 (see FIG. 1) below the special winning opening. Set up. Further, at a predetermined timing such as when the special game ends, the V ball entry device is set to a state in which the game ball can be received, and in this state, when the game ball is detected by the V ball entry device, the probability state thereafter is , The control is performed so that the probability change state is maintained over a predetermined period. Then, when the game ball does not enter the V ball entering device, or when the game ball does not enter a predetermined area in the V ball entering device, control is performed so that the probability state thereafter does not become a probable state. It is possible to do so.

Further, it is possible to give such a probability change by entering a ball only as an effect. That is, when a big hit with a certain change occurs in the big hit lottery, the V ball entry device is brought into a state where the game ball can be received at a predetermined timing. Then, if a distribution mechanism is provided in the V-ball entry device and a big hit with a certain change has been hit in advance, the game ball that has entered the V-ball entry device is guided to the area of the certain change, and the player makes a certain change. Perform the effect of having acquired. Further, in the case of hitting a jackpot without a certainty change in advance, it is possible to guide the game ball to a non-probable (normal) region and execute an effect that the player has obtained a certainty change.

Subsequently, as the above-mentioned effect after the special game, an example relating to the result of the effect contents during the special game can be exemplified. More specifically, it is possible to exemplify the content in which the winner expresses emotions according to the result of the fight between the characters. Such an effect after the special game can be called an ending effect.

Further, as the effect after the special game, an example in which the number of consecutive big hits is additionally displayed and a case in which the number of prize balls obtained by the player in the special game at that time are displayed can be exemplified. It is also possible to additionally display the number of times of a big hit when a big hit occurs during a specific game and the big hits continue. In addition, regarding the succession of big hits, when the number of occurrences of big hits reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute an effect pattern that is not selected before that.

Furthermore, when a small hit occurs, it is not possible to tell whether the small hit is generated, or during the game after the small hit is the same as in the normal time, and it is not possible to distinguish whether or not it is in a positive change. It is possible to produce contents.
<Various concrete examples>
<<Production by superimposing multiple production members>>

Next, various concrete effects that can be implemented in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with examples. First, it is possible to perform display by the effect display device 60, display of the light guide plate 88 described above, and effect by superimposing the movable effect members. This kind of effect is a composite effect in which the movable effect member is positioned in front of the effect display device 60 and the display content of the effect display device 60 is combined with the light decoration and movement of the movable effect member.

As an example, in the state in which any of the movable effect members is projected in front of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, at least a part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 is visible outside the movable effect member. Therefore, for example, when an image of the flame burning up is displayed on the effect display device 60, the effect of the combination in which the movable effect member performs the light decoration and the operation in front of the flame is executed. Further, the light guide plate 88 produces an effect such that a flame pattern blinks, or an effect that causes a ripple pattern to blink, so that the distance between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60 may be different. The visual effect can be exerted.

Further, in this state, by performing the effect by the movable effect member between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60, the state of the movable effect member and the image of the effect display device 60 are displayed on the light guide plate 88. It is possible for the player to visually recognize it while partially obstructing it. Further, by combining the change in the pattern-shaped display before and after the movable effect member, a complicated situation display can be superimposed on the movable effect member, and the environment in which the movable effect member is placed can be expressed in a complicated manner. ..

Due to these, more complicated effects can be performed and the effects can be diversified due to the limited configuration of the light guide plate 88, the movable effect member, and the effect display device 60. Even when the light guide plate 88 is changed to, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display body, a part of the transmissive liquid crystal display body is visually recognized as a movable effect member behind or a part of the display content of the effect display device 60. By setting the transmissive state to the extent possible, it is possible to perform an effect by superimposing as in the case of the light guide plate 88.

In addition, as a mode of using the light guide plate 88, a transmissive liquid crystal display, or the like (herein referred to as a light guide plate 88 or the like), a mode in which the light guide plate 88 or the like is emphasized and a mode in combination with the effect display device 60 are adopted. It is possible. In the above-mentioned "mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 or the like", the color display is performed to make a predetermined image stand out by using most of the display surface of the light guide plate 88 or the like, and the display content of the effect display device 60 behind is displayed. This is a display mode in which the player's consciousness is kept as low as possible.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "mode in combination with the effect display device 60", the ratio of the area of the portion of the light guide plate 88 or the like where color display is performed is suppressed to a predetermined degree, and the display of the effect display device 60 behind is displayed. This is a display mode in which the player is conscious of the contents and shows the player a combination of the display of the light guide plate 88 and the display of the effect display device 60. Then, in a predetermined case, the effect in the "mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 and the like" is executed, and in another predetermined case, the effect in the "mode in combination with the effect display device 60" is executed. , Etc. are possible.
<<<Reproduction using hold display>>>

Subsequently, various effects can be exemplified as the effect using the above-mentioned hold display. For example, a pending change suggesting effect that suggests that a pending change is performed is illustrated, and the fluctuation information display 198 of the fluctuation information display unit 195 shown in FIGS. The information display unit 195 displays character information (character state transition suggestion information) such as "color change?", which suggests that the reserved color changes and the degree of expectation increases. Then, after the display of such state transition suggestion information, the variation information display 198 in the variation information display unit 195 may change to a high expectation degree such as red or iridescent. To do.

It is also possible to display such a display as "color change?" as one pattern of the roulette wheel or one symbol of the rotating drum (reel). For example, the information display such as “no change”, “color change?”, “red”, and “rainbow” is adopted as the pattern of the roulette wheel or the design of the rotating drum, and the roulette or rotation is displayed on the variation information display section 195. Display drum objects. Then, in the variation information display unit 195, the display of “no change”, “color change?”, “red”, and “rainbow” are sequentially changed, and the variation information display thereafter is performed in a mode corresponding to the stopped information. It is conceivable that 198 be performed. It is also possible to display the objects of the roulette and the rotating drum without erasing the variation information display 198.

Further, as another mode of the effect using the hold display, when the hold change is performed in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the hold change is performed. It is possible to proactively notify that a change has occurred or that a pending change will occur immediately by displaying pending change information such as "holding change", "red holding", or "rainbow holding". To be Here, such display of the hold change information may be performed in the center of the display area 194 in the effect display device 60, or the hold change is displayed in the first hold number display unit 196 or the second hold number display unit 197. It may be performed near the hold display.

As described above, one or a plurality of types of hold change suggesting effects that suggest that a hold change is to be performed are provided, and the hold change ratio and the hold change are made depending on whether or not the hold change suggesting effect is executed. It is also preferable to make the degree of change (for example, the rate at which the reserved color changes from blue to red different between type A and type B) when different. In addition, when there are a plurality of hold displays and a hold change can be made to the plurality of hold displays, it is not possible to know which hold change will be made at the start of the hold change suggestive effect. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest from the viewpoint of whether the previously changed hold is further changed or the unchanged hold is changed.

Further, when executing the pending change suggestion effect, the timing of the pending change can be various timings during the change of the symbol. For example, when the pending change suggestion production is made to use the area dedicated to the pending change suggestion or an image object, a plurality of start/ends are performed at arbitrary timings that do not overlap with the fixed stop period of the decorative design (production design). You can set the timing.

On the other hand, when the pending change suggesting effect is not exclusively for the pending change suggesting and is performed in conjunction with the variation effect of the decorative pattern, for example, a pseudo decorative pattern that suggests the pending change using the display area of the decorative pattern It is possible to execute a pending change suggesting effect that displays (for example, "holding change pattern"). Then, in this case, it is possible to set a timing at which one or a plurality of rows of symbols are temporarily stopped or a timing at which a stop symbol is announced in advance.

In addition to the various hold change timings described here, the hold color can be changed at the start of hold display or at the time of shifting.
<Various commands sent from the main board to the sub-main board>

Next, main commands of various commands transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be described. First, as the transmission timing of the command, during the initial screen display, during the customer waiting demo (standby demo), when the symbol variation of the special symbol starts, when the symbol of the special symbol is confirmed, during the symbol determination of the special symbol, during the big hit start demonstration, When the big hit middle and big prize opening is open, when the big hit middle and big winning opening is closed, when the winning end demonstration, when the big hit ending demonstration ends. Among these, during the initial screen display, it is a period from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 10 to the start of the customer waiting demo until the steady state is entered. In addition, at the time of winning the start, at the time of power failure recovery, and at the time of error detection, command transmission is performed in any case. Further, command transmission is executed even when the RWM is cleared.

Among these, commands for clearing the RWM include commands for effect display initialization, effect LED initialization, and various errors. The effect display device initialization command is for displaying a predetermined effect pattern on the effect display device 60. The effect LED initialization command is to turn on a part of the game effect lamp when the communication is normal. The various error commands are for displaying an effect according to the error state.

There is a customer waiting demo command as a customer waiting demo command. This customer waiting demo command is for setting the effect display device 60 and the game effect lamp for the customer waiting demo and erasing the voice.

As the command at the time of starting the symbol variation of the special symbol, the number of symbols 1 stored, the number of symbols 2 stored, the communication inspection 1, the communication inspection 2, the number of performances A to Z, the production selection states 0 to 2, the variation additional information, the design 1 production There are commands for a pattern, a symbol 2 effect pattern, a symbol 1 character effect, and a pattern 2 character effect. The symbol 1 storage number command indicates the number of pending storage of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 storage number command indicates the number of pending storage of the second special symbol. The communication inspection 1 command and the communication inspection 2 command are for confirming whether or not normal communication is performed. The various commands for the effect counts A to Z indicate the number of times related to the effect according to the limited frequency table described above, and the various commands in the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the type of effect according to the limited frequency table. It is a thing. The variation additional information command indicates information for adding an element (effect constituent element) for suggesting a big hit expectation degree or the like to the effect pattern. The symbol 1 production pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 production pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is a thing. The symbol 1 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the second special symbol. is there.

As a command when the symbol of the special symbol is fixed, there are commands for stopping the symbol 1 effect pattern and stopping the symbol 2 effect pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and the symbol 2 effect pattern stop command are for stopping the effect symbols 190 based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively.

As the command during the symbol determination of the special symbol, the variation time reduction number 0 (at low probability), the variation time reduction number AZ (at low probability), the variation time reduction number 0 (at high probability), probability variation ( Commands up to a predetermined number of fluctuations). These are for transmitting commands relating to the game state at that time, and are used for effect mode display, time saving display, and the like.

As commands at the time of big hit start demo, there are a symbol 1 big hit start demo, a symbol 2 big hit start demo, and a command for designating a firing position. The symbol 1 jackpot start demo command and the symbol 2 jackpot start demo command are for displaying a start demo based on the jackpot pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The launch position designation command is for notifying the launch position when causing the player to hit the game balls by so-called left hitting or right hitting.

As commands for opening the big hit middle and big winning opening, there are commands of demo 1 to 16 for symbol 1 big hit and demos 1 to 16 for symbol 2 big hit. These are for displaying effects based on the big hit symbol and the number of rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

As a command at the time of closing the big hit middle and big winning opening, there is a big winning opening closing production command. This is for displaying the special winning opening closing effect.

As commands at the time of a big hit end demo, there are commands for a symbol 1 end demo and a symbol 2 end demo. These are for displaying the hit end demonstration effect based on the hit symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

As commands at the time of starting winning, there are commands of winning notice (winning notice effect), symbol notice (winning symbol notice effect), variation notice (pattern notice effect), symbol 1 memory number, symbol 2 memory number. Each of the winning notice, the symbol notice, and the variation notice command is a command (prefetch command) related to the above-mentioned prefetch effect by the advance information notifying unit 157. Then, the winning advance notice command is for transmitting the random number range of the winning and rejecting random number, and includes winning and winning information according to the lottery probability. The symbol notice command is for transmitting a random number value range of symbol random numbers, and includes information relating to the type of winning. Furthermore, the fluctuation notice command is for transmitting the random number range of the fluctuation pattern, and can be used to specify the type of the fluctuation pattern group (no reach, normal reach, super reach, or the like). The number of symbols 1 memory, the command of number of symbols 2 memory is for transmitting the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, in the present embodiment, the result of the win/loss lottery, the presence or absence of the prefetch effect, the period, and the like are transmitted to the sub-main board 301 by each command of a winning notice, a symbol notice, and a variation notice.

As the command at the time of power failure recovery, communication inspection 1, communication test 2, power failure recovery gaming states A to E, number of effects AZ, effect selection states 0 to 2, symbol 1 character effect, symbol 2 character effect, There is a command of power interruption recovery hit state, power interruption recovery special symbol 1 state, power interruption recovery special symbol 2 state, firing position designation, errors a to d, symbol 1 memory number, symbol 2 memory number.

The commands of the communication inspection 1 and the communication inspection 2 are for confirming whether or not normal communication is performed. The commands in the game states A to E for recovering from power failure are for transmitting different commands depending on the game status at the time of power failure. The commands of the effect numbers A to Z show the number of times of the effects according to the limited frequency table described above, and the commands of the effect selection states 0 to 2 show the types of effects according to the limited frequency table. is there. The symbol 1 character effect, the symbol 2 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

The power failure recovery hit state command is for transmitting a different command depending on whether or not it is hit. Special symbol 1 state at the time of power failure recovery, command of the special symbol 2 status at the time of power failure recovery, the command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, depending on the state such as waiting, changing, hit It is for. The firing position designation command is for designating an appropriate firing position according to the situation, as described above. The errors a to d are for transmitting the presence or absence and the type of error. The number of symbols 1 memory, the command of number of symbols 2 memory is for transmitting the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
<Main control processing of main board>

Next, main control processing in the main board 102 of the pachinko gaming machine 10 having the above-described configuration will be described based on FIGS. 14 to 19 and the like. Prior to the explanation, the terms "special electric accessory", "condition device", and "continuous accessory operating device" used below will be explained. Each of these represents a conceptual device in the control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Of these, the "special electric accessory" is to activate (open) the special winning opening of the special winning opening device 90. It is a thing. In addition, the "condition device" is to operate when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, and the "feature continuous operation device" is to continuously activate the special electric auditors multiple times. Can be done.

Further, the main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described here is the power-on processing shown in FIG. 14 (also referred to as “control start processing” on the main board), the initial setting processing shown in FIG. 15, and FIG. The setting change process shown, the game progress interrupt process shown in FIG. 17, the (win/fail) lottery determination process shown in FIG. 18, and the power-off process shown in FIG. 19 are executed on the main board 102.
<Power-on process>

The power-on process which is schematically shown in FIG. 14 is a control process which is started after a security check using the manufacturing code of the CPU 501 is performed when the pachinko game machine 10 is powered on. In this power-on process, an initial setting process (S101) is executed as shown in the figure. In the initial setting process (S101), a process related to the setting value is executed, and the contents of the initial setting process (S101) will be described later.

After the initial setting process (S101), it is determined whether the RWM clear button (RWM clear switch (544)) is operated (S102). In S102, if the RWM clear button is operated (S102: YES), the RWM clear process (S103) is executed, and the RWM clear information is sent to the sub side (sub main board 301 side). (S4). Further, information indicating that the power is turned on normally (information indicating that the power is turned on normally) is stored in the RWM (S105), and the timer interrupt is permitted (S106). By permitting this timer interrupt (S106), it becomes possible to perform game progress interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle (here, 4 ms). Furthermore, various random numbers are updated each time the loop processing (circulation processing) is repeated (S107).

Here, as the random number updated in the random number update process (S107), various initial value random numbers such as normal symbol initial value random number, special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and special symbol per soft initial value random number can be given. You can In updating various random numbers, a 2-byte soft random number updating process can be used as a common control module. Further, the random number updated in the random number updating process (S107) is the software random number described above, and depending on the type of the random number, the software random number updated in the random number updating process (S107) and the hardware random number described above. It is also possible to generate a random number value by the calculation of.

If the RWM clear button has not been operated in S102 (S102: NO), it is determined whether or not the power-off normal information is stored in the RWM (S111). Then, when the information indicating that the power is cut off is stored in the RWM (S111: YES), the RWM check is performed (S112), and it is determined whether or not the data in the RWM (data within a predetermined range) is normal. It is performed (S113). In S113, if the data in the RWM is not normal (S113: YES), the process proceeds to the RWM clear process (S103).

If the information of power-off normal is stored in the RWM in the above S111 (S111:NO) and the data in the RWM is normal in the above S113 (S113:NO), the power is shut off from the RWM. The data of various information commands at the time is acquired (S116). Further, the data of the obtained various information commands is transmitted to the sub-main substrate 301 side (S117), the solenoid is reset and set (S118), and the above-described S105 (processing for saving information on normal power-on in the RWM). Move to.
<Initial setting processing>

Next, the initial setting process (S101 in FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG. In this initial setting process, the setting process of each port register is executed (S121), and it is determined whether or not the setting key has been inserted (S122). When the setting key is inserted (S22: YES), the setting value changing process (S126) is performed, and the setting value changing process (S126) will be described later.

When the setting key is not inserted in S122 (S122: NO), the setting value information is read (read) (S123), and it is determined whether the setting value is abnormal (S124). .. When the set value is not abnormal (S124: NO), the initial setting process is ended, but when the set value is abnormal (S124: YES), the set value abnormality is notified (S128). Then, the set value abnormality information is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 side (S129), and thereafter, the loop state is set.
<Setting value change processing>

Next, the above-mentioned set value changing process (S126 in FIG. 15) will be described with reference to FIG. In this setting value change processing, the RWM of the setting value storage area is checked (S131), and it is determined whether the setting value information is abnormal (S132). If there is no abnormality in the set value information (S132: NO), it is determined whether the RWM clear switch is input (S133). If the RWM clear switch is input (S133: YES), the set value is set. The set value according to the information is displayed (S134).

If the setting value information is abnormal in S132 (S132: YES), the setting value is forcibly set and a default value (here, "1") is set in the setting value information (S141). Then, the setting value compulsory setting information is transmitted to the sub-main substrate 301 (S142), and then the setting value is displayed (S133).

After S134, it is determined whether or not a setting value changing operation has been performed (S135), and if there is a changing operation (S135: YES), the setting value information at that time is incremented by 1 (S136). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the set value information has reached the set upper limit value (here, “6”) (S137), and if it has reached the upper limit value (S137: YES), the set value information at that time is set to “ 1” (S138). Then, it is determined whether or not the setting change is completed (whether or not the setting key is removed) (S139), and if completed (S139: YES), the display of the set value is stopped (the display is erased in S140). Then, the setting value changing process ends.

If there is no change setting in S135 (S135: NO), the process of adding the set value information (S136) to the process of setting the set lower limit value (here, "1") is not performed (S138). Then, the process shifts to a determination process (S139) as to whether or not the setting change is completed. If the setting value information does not reach the upper limit value in S137 (S137: NO), it is determined whether the setting change is completed without performing the setting lower limit value setting process (S138) in S137. To the determination process (S139). Further, if the setting change is not completed in S139 (S139: NO), the process returns to the setting value display process of S134.

In S133, if the RWM clear switch is not input (S133: NO), the set value corresponding to the set value information is displayed as in S134 (S146). Further, similar to S139, it is determined whether or not the setting change is completed (whether or not the setting key is removed) (S147), and if completed (S147: YES), the process proceeds to S139. The display of the set value is stopped (the display is erased in S140), and the set value changing process ends. If the setting change has not been completed in S147 (S147: NO), the process returns to the setting value display process of S136.

That is, in S133, when the RWM clear switch is input (S133: YES), the set value is displayed (S134), and the process for changing the set value (S135 to S138, etc.) is performed. It will be possible. However, in S133, when the RWM clear switch is not input (S133: NO), the set value is displayed (S146), but the process for changing the set value as in S135 to S138 is performed. The set value is displayed in a state where it is not possible (this state may be referred to as a set display mode).
<Game progress interrupt processing>

Next, a game progress interrupt process (FIG. 17) that is repeated for each timer interrupt of a predetermined cycle will be described. This game progress interrupt process (also called "timer interrupt process") is omitted in the above description, but at a predetermined cycle (here, 4 ms cycle) based on the cycle information set in the power-on process (FIG. 14). Repeated. As shown in FIG. 17, in the game progress interrupt processing, setting of interrupt operation conditions (S41, S42), recursion of interrupt processing time monitoring means (S43), management of gaming machines (S45 to S70), and interrupt permission ( S71) is sequentially performed to return to the process before the game progress interrupt is generated.

Specifically, in the process of setting the interrupt operation condition (S41, S42), in order to clear the interrupt flag, the interrupt operation condition setting value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41), and the interrupt operation condition setting The value is set in the control register corresponding to the predetermined input terminal (S42). After that, the second recursive information is set (S43), and further the second recursive information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means register (S44). As will be described later, the second recursion information is a condition for recurring and restarting the monitoring timekeeping of the interrupt processing time monitoring means together with the previously set first recursion information.

In the management of the gaming machine (S45 to S70), the following processes are executed in order to manage the gaming machine. First, in order to monitor the input of a specific signal, an input process (S45) is executed. The targets of monitoring here are various switches mounted on the game board surface, saucer full tank switch, open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, glass non-detection signal, and short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal. Is.

Subsequently, various random number update processing (S46) is executed to update the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number. Furthermore, the initial value update type random number update process (S47) is executed to update the normal random number per symbol, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the special symbol per soft random number. Next, the initial value random number update process (S48) is executed, and the normal value per random number, the special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and the special symbol per soft initial value random number are updated. Further, in order to update the 2-byte timer, the timer subtraction process (S49) is executed, and in order to set the effective period of the second starting winning opening 63, the effective period setting process (S50) of the second starting port is executed. ..

Furthermore, the winning monitoring process (S51) is executed, and the number of payouts of prize balls is stored, the output request of the external information for the board is made, and the transmission request of the command to be transmitted to the sub-board 104 is performed. Then, in order to control the payout control board 103, a prize ball control process (S52) is executed.

Next, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operating gate (operating port 68), in order to store the random number related to the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol operating gate monitoring process (S53) is executed, and the ordinary symbol display device or the ordinary symbol. In order to perform the process related to the electric accessory, the normal symbol control process (S54) is executed. Furthermore, in order to monitor the variation start of the normal symbol, the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S55) is executed. In addition, in order to monitor the winning of the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63 of the game ball, the starting opening monitoring control process (S56) is executed, and the first special symbol display unit 70 or the second special symbol. In order to perform the processing relating to the display unit 71, the special symbol control processing (S57) is executed. Next, in order to perform the processing related to the special electric auditors product, the special electric auditors product control processing (S58) is executed, and in order to perform the processing related to the effective period of the special winning opening, the special winning opening valid period setting processing (S59) The first special symbol, and, in order to monitor the variation start of the second special symbol, to execute the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60).

Next, in order to monitor magnetism, disconnection/short-circuit/power supply, radio wave, open/closed state of glass frame set/game board frame, and pair glass, an abnormality detection process (S61) is executed. Then, in order to detect an abnormality in the passing time of the ball entering the ball, an abnormality detecting process of the ball passing time (S62) is executed. Furthermore, in order to make a display request for the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, an error state, the number of operation reserved balls of the normal symbol display device, and the number of operation reserved balls of the special symbol display device, a game state display process (S63) ) Is performed to monitor the touch state of the firing handle 20 (including the operation amount state), the handle state signal inspection process (S64) is performed. In addition, the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol display device (70, 71), the display of the number of operation holding balls of the normal symbol display device, the display of the game state, the special electric accessory The LED output process (S65) is executed in order to display the number of times that has been operated continuously and the error.

Subsequently, in order to output a signal for prohibiting/permitting the shooting of the game ball, a shooting control signal output process (S66) is executed, and a signal to be output to the test apparatus is created and output, so that a test signal output process (S67). To execute. Furthermore, in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid and the special winning opening (open) solenoid, the solenoid output processing (S68) is executed, and the production control command is transmitted in order to transmit the production control command. S69) is executed to output signals to the external terminals (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)), the external information output processing (S70) is executed.

After that, the interrupt permission (S71) is executed, and the control process returns to the return (RET). Then, the remaining time until the next game interruption is executed is used to execute the above-described circulation processing of the power-on processing (FIG. 14) (circulation processing repeated including the random number updating processing of S7). ..
<<Handle state signal inspection process>>

In the above-mentioned handle state signal inspection process (S64), since the touch state of the firing handle 20 is monitored, the handle state is inspected, and when it is determined that the handle state has changed as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitoring timer Is subtracted, the steering wheel state is updated, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is set, and the steering wheel state effect command transmission request is performed. When it is determined that the handle state has not changed as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitoring timer is set. In addition, in the subtraction of the handle state monitoring timer, when it is determined that the handle timer is being subtracted, the subsequent process regarding the handle state is not performed.
<Lottery determination process>

Next, the above-described lottery determination processing (also referred to as “lottery determination processing”) will be described. This lottery determination process is a process of determining whether or not to win by using probability data (a process of performing a jackpot lottery determination). In addition, the lottery determination process can be performed in, for example, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60) in the game progress interrupt process (FIG. 17) described above.

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the lottery determination processing relating to the win or failure. In this lottery determination processing, first, when proceeding to step S1022, the main CPU 501 sets 1 in a predetermined register (for example, C register) as winning number data, and proceeds to next step S1024. When proceeding to step S1024, the main CPU 501 sets 2 as the number-of-repetitions data, and proceeds to next step S1025. In the winning number data, "1" indicates a big hit and "2" indicates a small hit.

When proceeding to step S1025, the main CPU 501 acquires probability data from the lottery table. Specifically, the main CPU 501 designates the gaming state (probability variation state or normal probability state) and the address of the probability data according to the set value, and acquires the probability data corresponding to the designated address from the lottery table. And store it in the register. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1026.

When the processing proceeds to step S1026, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not it is true. Here, the main CPU 501 first stores a random number value for winning/non-winning determination, which is acquired when a winning is made in the starting opening, in a comparison register (eg, a DE register) for lottery, and then is acquired in step S1025. The value stored in the above probability data is subtracted from the value in the comparison register to obtain a new value in the comparison register. In this way, the value of the comparison register is updated.

In the next step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not it has been won. Here, when the value of the DE register becomes smaller than "0" (when a carry occurs) by subtracting the probability data from the value of the comparison register (for example, the DE register), "1" is set in the carry flag of the flag register. Set. That is, the carry flag is set. Further, "carry occurs" means that the carry flag is set to "1". Then, in step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the player has won by determining whether or not the carry flag is set to “1”.

Here, when the carry flag is not set to "1", the main CPU 501 determines that it has not won (No), and proceeds to the next step S1028. On the other hand, when the carry flag is set to "1", the main CPU 501 determines that it has won (Yes), skips steps S1028 to S1033, and ends the processing according to this flowchart. Here, the winning number data set when “Yes” in step S1027 indicates the winning number determined by the lottery determination (for example, if the winning number is 1, a big hit, if the winning number is 2, a small hit). It will be.

In the next step S1028, the main CPU 501 updates the winning number data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 adds “1” to the value of the winning number data (for example, C register) to obtain a new winning number data (for example, C register) value. That is, the value of the winning number data (for example, C register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1029.

When the processing proceeds to step S1029, the main CPU 501 updates the repeat count data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 subtracts “1” from the value of the repeat count data (for example, the B register) to obtain a new repeat count data (for example, the B register). That is, the value of the repeat count data (for example, B register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1030.

When the processing proceeds to step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the value of the repeat count data (for example, B register) is “0”. Here, when the value of the repeat count data (for example, B register) is “0”, it indicates that the repeat count has ended, and the repeat count data (for example, B register) is not “0” (“0”). (Greater than) indicates that the number of repetitions has not ended. Then, in step S1030, main CPU 501 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended by determining whether the value of the number of repetitions data (for example, B register) is “0”.

Here, when the value of the B register is “0”, the main CPU 501 determines that the number of times of repetition has ended (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1033. On the other hand, when the value of the B register is not "0", the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has not ended (No), and returns to step S1025.

If “No” in the step S1030, the same probability data as the previous time is used, and the success/failure determination in the step S1026 is performed again. In the next step S1033, the main CPU 501 sets the value of the winning number data (for example, the C register) to "00(H)" which is the non-winning data, and ends the processing according to this flowchart.

With the above-described configuration, as described in step S1028, the process of updating the winning number data is included in the lottery determination process, so it is not necessary to store the winning number data in the lottery table. Further, by determining the winning number using the number of times of repetition and the same probability data, it is not necessary to repeatedly set the same probability data in the lottery table, so that the amount of ROM used by the lottery table can be reduced.

In addition, in this example, the winning numbers corresponding to the small hit and the big hit are provided one by one, and the type of the big hit and the small hit is determined by the random number of the symbols separately obtained at the time of the hit, but these types are determined by this process. Is also possible. In that case, if the value of the repeat count data in step S1024 is changed according to the number of types and probability data for each winning number (range value corresponding to each winning number) is set, the same determination routine is used. It is also possible.
<Power-off processing>

Next, a power-off process executed when power-off occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the power-off process, the data of all the used registers are saved in the RWM (S81), and the interrupt enable/disable state before the power-off is saved (S82). Further, it is determined whether or not the power-on normal information is stored in the RWM (S83), and if it is not stored (S83: NO), the power-off abnormality information is stored in the RWM (S84), The process moves to RWM access prohibition processing (S88). On the other hand, if it has been saved (S83: YES), the value of the stack pointer is saved in the stack pointer buffer (S85), the information of normal power-off is saved in the RWM (S86), and the checksum of the RWM is calculated. Then, the checksum data is saved (S87). Then, the access to the RWM is prohibited (S88), and the control process is looped to wait for the reset of the CPU 501.

In addition, in this power-off processing, even if both the first recursive information and the second recursive information described above have not been set, the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursive means, and the first recursive information and the second recursive information are used. Information is set, the timekeeping for monitoring of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the timekeeping is recurred. Further, in this embodiment, the forced setting of the first recursive information and the second recursive information is performed immediately after the start of the power interruption process and before the saving process (S81) of all the registers to be used. It is being appreciated. Then, when the power supply is restarted, the control process is started in a state where the timekeeping for monitoring recurs. In other words, by forcing the monitoring timing to recur when a power failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the control processing from proceeding without the monitoring timing recurring in the control processing immediately after the power supply is restarted. Is becoming
<Other individual control processing modes>
<<Control Mode Related to Command Transmission Timing>>

In this embodiment, the effect control command output from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 is temporarily stored in the command buffer by a command request before transmission. The command buffer is a plurality of buffers functioning as a ring buffer. In the control process for command transmission (here, the production control command transmission process (S69)), the command buffer is stored once in the order of accumulation in the command buffer. In the game progress interrupt process, one command (a pair of data of MODE and EVENT) is taken out from the command buffer and transmitted. Note that it is also possible to employ a method in which a command having a higher priority is transmitted first. Further, in various control processes, when a command that needs to be transmitted occurs, the command can be transmitted at any time. When such a method is adopted, during one game progress interrupt process, production commands are collectively transmitted within one control processing module such as the production control command transmission process (S69). Instead of this, each time the command needs to be transmitted, the command is sequentially transmitted in each control processing module. Therefore, it is unlikely that the command transmission is carried over to the game progress interrupt process after the next time. Then, for example, the command at the time of starting winning and the command transmission at the time of starting the variation of the special symbol are not delayed, and prompt command processing can be performed.
<<Control Mode Related to Update of Suspended Storage>>

In the present embodiment, as described above, the configuration in which the second game is prioritized is adopted, and since the regularity is provided in the execution order of the first and second plurality of games, the pending storage is updated. Are sequentially performed for each of the second game and the first game. Therefore, the update of the information stored on hold is completed by only updating the information stored on hold for each of the second game and the first game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of prioritizing the first game or prioritizing any game, the reserved memory is exhausted in the order in which the start winning occurs and the reserved memory is stored (winning order digestion). It is also possible to adopt a configuration that does. Of these, if a configuration is adopted in which the reserved memory is consumed in the order in which the start winnings occur, updating the reserved memory information according to the consumption, updating the total number of reserved games for a plurality of games, and storing the winning order. As a result, the information stored on hold can be updated as a whole.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to notify the sub main board 301 that the pending storage has been updated, as described above, the request for the symbol storage number command (symbol 1 storage number command or symbol 2 storage number command) is made. By including both the symbol 1 memory number command and the symbol 2 memory number command in one command, it is possible to reduce the required program and memory capacity.
<<Control Mode Related to Variation Pattern Lottery>>

Subsequently, various aspects related to the lottery of the variation pattern will be described. As for the mode of determining the variation pattern described here, either one may be selected and applied in one pachinko game machine 10, or may be appropriately used in combination. When a plurality of aspects are used together, it is possible to properly use the aspects, for example, based on factors such as the result of winning or rejecting.

In this embodiment, in the determination of the variation pattern, as described above, the result of winning, the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (may be a symbol group), and the variation pattern selection state (status information of the special symbol) are determined. Although used as an element, a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to a combination of these determinants is selected. Then, along with the determination of the variation pattern table, the variation time that is paired with the variation pattern by using the variation pattern random number is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, with regard to the determination of the variation pattern, the variation pattern table is made different depending on whether the result of the winning/winning lottery is a big hit or not. That is, in the case of a big hit, based on the status information of the special symbol such as the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (group), and the random number, the variation pattern table is selected from among those linked to these. On the other hand, in the case of a deviation, a variation pattern table is selected from among those linked to these based on the game state, the special symbol, the number of reserved balls, and the random number of winning and winning. Among these, in the case of a big hit, for the variation pattern to which the time of re-lottery is given on the production, the time of re-lottery is given based on the production state (whether or not there is a specific production) and the special symbol group. Presence/absence is determined, and the determined result is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301.

In addition, when determining the variation pattern and the variation time, it is possible to determine the variation additional information according to the determined variation pattern number, and to determine the subsequent variation time based on the variation additional information. For example, when the selected variation pattern corresponds to the limited frequency pattern effect, it is conceivable that the extension of the variation time corresponding thereto is determined ex post facto.

Further, as described above, by setting the command of the variation additional information as the command at the time of starting the symbol variation of the special symbol, the variation determined in advance in relation to the game state or the winning symbol on the sub-main board 301. The effect of adding the additional time to the time later can be performed. Then, in such an aspect, when deciding the total variation time of the effect design, it is possible to create various variation patterns while suppressing the number of variation patterns provided in advance as follows. Is. That is, considering the case of giving the above-mentioned pseudo continuous notice (so-called “pseudo continuous”), when the pseudo continuous variation patterns are simply set individually, the same number of variation patterns as the number of types of effects are provided in advance. I need to put it. Then, in the case where effect patterns such as effect patterns on the sub-main board 301 are prepared for the change patterns individually determined by the main board 102, the total number of change patterns on the main board 102 is large. Therefore, it is conceivable that the number will exceed 256, for example. Therefore, in order to give a distinguishable code to a large number of fluctuation patterns, it becomes necessary to increase the number of bits and the number of bytes for representing the code, as compared with the conventional case.

However, by using the variation additional information (variation additional pattern), it is possible to form a variation pattern ex post facto by connecting to the relatively small number of basic variation patterns, for example, variation additional information randomly selected. Is. In this way, a new variation pattern can be formed by combining the variation patterns, so that various variation patterns can be created without increasing the number of variation patterns provided in advance. It should be noted that the random number value relating to the variation additional information can also be transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 as a command for prefetch effect when the start winning occurs. It is also possible to set the appearance probability of the variation addition pattern so that the variation addition information can be easily added when the limited frequency pattern effect is executed. As a further example of using the variation additional information, when "777", which is a probability variation symbol, is displayed from the beginning as the combination of the effect symbols 190, the variation additional information is not set and the effect symbols 190 are combined. , When "666" which is a non-probable variation pattern is once displayed, the effect until the result of whether to promote to "777" is displayed (for example, the effect of shaking fluctuation and the development of the variation mode) There is also a case where the variable additional information is set and performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by using the number of reserved balls as an element, and the referenced fluctuation pattern table differs depending on how many reserved balls are. The fluctuation pattern table is provided in correspondence with the number of reserved balls 0 to 4. The reason why not only the four hold patterns 0 to 3 but also the variation pattern table corresponding to the hold 4 is provided is as follows. For example, consider a case where a new variable display is started when the number of reserved balls is four, and the number of reserved balls is three. A state in which the number of holding balls is 3 at a stage where the control process in the game progress interrupt process being executed at that time has not yet reached the determination of the variation pattern which is the process in the subsequent game progress interrupt process. When a new starting prize is generated, the number of reserved balls is added to 4 when the variation pattern is determined. Therefore, the variation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4 so that such a situation can be an element for determining the variation pattern.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table may be provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 3. In this case, in the control process, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the start winning is not added from the state of the number of reserved balls 3 to the determination of the variation pattern. It should be noted that any of the aspects can be applied to a pachinko game machine of a type in which a maximum holding number other than 4 (for example, 8) is set.

Further, the fluctuation pattern random number may be acquired at the fluctuation pattern lottery time. That is, since the variation pattern random number is not a random number related to operation of a special electric auditor or other accessory product, as an element for performing an appropriate game, compared to a random number or the like, for example, in aiming for a fair game. The need for restrictions is reduced. Therefore, it is conceivable that the variation pattern random number is not intentionally acquired at the time of winning the start, and for example, the variation pattern random number is acquired and stored at the time of the variation pattern lottery as a separately provided timing. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the number of information to be stored at the time of starting winning, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of the program and the memory.
<<Control mode related to designating symbols>>

In the lottery of symbols, determine the symbol determination table to be used based on the value of the upper byte of the code indicating the symbol random number, and then determine the symbol from the determined symbol determination table based on the value of the lower byte of the symbol random number, etc. Is also possible. In the present embodiment, the numerical range of symbol random numbers is set to "0 to 999", so the binary code of these numerical values can be used. By doing so, the capacity of the memory and the program can be reduced. In addition, the game state such as the number of rounds and the number of shortening times is distributed to the winning symbols (may be a group of symbols), and the number of rounds and the number of shortening times thereafter and the opening time of the special winning opening are determined according to the winning symbol. Alternatively, the opening pattern or the like may be determined. By doing so, it is not necessary to store the data unique to the game state and control processing, and the capacity of the memory and the program can be reduced. Furthermore, in the command (for example, each command of the symbol 1 effect pattern and the symbol 2 effect pattern in the present embodiment) that conveys a symbol or the like from the main substrate 102 to the sub-main substrate 301, information that conveys the game state (game state designation information) ) Can be added. This command is not sent to the sub-main board 301 immediately after being created, but is created and temporarily stored, and is sent to the sub-main board 301 after waiting a predetermined timing.
<<Relationship between variation time of special design and production design>>

As described above, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and the corresponding effect symbol 190 are controlled to start and stop changing in synchronization with each other. Depending on the variation time of the effect symbol 190, the variation time of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) can be shortened to some extent.

That is, the variation of the special symbol or the variation pattern is determined, and when the variation of the special symbol is started, the variation start command (command at the time of variation) of the effect symbol is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main substrate 301. However, the time required for transmitting and receiving a predetermined command (for example, the first command of the commands at the start of fluctuation) and the command buffer (the ring buffer type is used in this embodiment) are set and waiting. Influenced by the time until all the existing commands (first-in command) are sent out, it is conceivable that the variation start of the effect symbol will be delayed by that amount than the variation start of the special symbol. Furthermore, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, a fluctuation stop command (a command for determining the symbol of the special symbol) is transmitted to the sub-main board 301, but a predetermined command (for example, the first command of the command at the time of starting the symbol variation fluctuation). It is possible that the stop of the variation of the effect design is delayed due to the time required for the transmission and reception of) and the congestion of the command buffer (the degree of the number of commands waiting for transmission).

In this way, the variation time of the effect symbol is set to some extent with respect to the variation time of the special symbol based on the command transmitted at the start of the variation, and by performing the swing variation, the special symbol starts the next variation. I try to avoid the situation where the last symbol is stopped and displayed later. Although there is a possibility that the display during shaking fluctuation may be extended to the next fluctuation due to the processing delay due to the number of commands, the amount of delay is small because the number of commands transmitted to the sub-main substrate 301 is smaller at the end of fluctuation than at the start of fluctuation. Is suppressed, it is possible to almost certainly fix the effect symbol during the display fixed time of the special symbol.
<<Preliminary Judgment of Winning/Lottery Results>>

First, in the present embodiment, as described above (FIG. 9A, FIG. 12 ), the win/loss random value range in the first lottery and the second lottery is “0 to 65535”. 0-65535" is divided into a plurality of random value range (here, A to N), as shown in FIG. 13(a).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13( a ), in the random number range of win/loss, “0 to 205” belongs to the classification of the prefetch code A, and “206” belongs to the classification of the prefetch code B. Belong to. Furthermore, the random number values “207” to “210” belong to the classification of the prefetch codes C to F, respectively. The win/fail random number values “211 to 615” belong to the classification of the look-ahead code G, and the win/fail random number values “616 to 618” belong to the classification of the look-ahead code H.

Then, the random number values “619 to 621”, “622 to 624”, “625 to 627”, and “628 to 630” belong to the classification of the prefetch codes HL, respectively. Further, the random number values “64874 to 65534” of the win/fail belong to the classification of the prefetch code M. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the random number values “631 to 64873” and “65534” belong to the classification of the prefetch code M.

FIG. 13B shows the contents of each prefetch code. As shown in the figure, the pre-reading code A means that all the settings are hit (big hit) regardless of the set value. Next, the pre-read code B means that when the set value is “2” or more, it is a win in both the normal time and the probability change time. That is, the pre-read code B indicates a hit at both the normal probability and the high probability if the set value is "2" or more, but it indicates a hit when the set value is "1". Further, the pre-read codes C to F mean that if the set value is "3" or more to "6", it will be a hit in both the normal time and the high probability time regardless of the probability state.

Subsequently, the prefetch code G means that any setting value will be a win as long as the probability change is in progress. That is, the look-ahead code G indicates a hit when the probability is high, but indicates a hit when the probability is normal. Further, the pre-read code H means that if the probability change is in progress, it hits at the set value "2" or more. Further, the pre-reading codes I to L mean that, if the probability change is in progress, a hit occurs when the set value is “3” or more to “6”. Further, the pre-reading code M means a small hit, and the pre-reading code N means that the pre-reading code N is out (out) regardless of the set value or the probability state.

Using the look-ahead codes classified as described above, for example, the main board 102 determines the look-ahead code to which the acquired random number value belongs, and the information (command) corresponding to the determined look-ahead code is used as the advance notification information. It is possible to transmit to the sub-main substrate 301. Then, on the side of the sub-main board 301, it is possible to perform a hit announcement effect as a look-ahead effect in association with the hit/miss determination result without waiting for the hold to be exhausted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the pre-determination of the type of the special symbol and the pre-determination of the type of the variation pattern related to the special symbol, as in the case of the result of the above-mentioned winning/winning lottery, the determination based on the random value range It is supposed to be done. And, the types of special symbols and the types of variation patterns related to the special symbols are provided in a larger number than the types of the result of the win/fail lottery, and the number of prefetch codes (the number of groups) is also larger than that in the win/win lottery. Has become. However, as a pre-determination method based on the random number value range, it is possible to perform the same as the pre-determination related to the above-mentioned win/fail judgment, although the random number range and the type of the lottery result to be grouped are different. .. Therefore, here, the detailed description of the preliminary judgment based on the random number value range regarding the symbol notice effect and the pattern notice effect will be omitted.

By performing the preliminary determination based on such a range of random number values, it is possible to round the information, and it is possible to create a command related to the preliminary determination with a small amount of information. That is, when the number of random number values exceeds 256, the number of bytes required to represent the random number value exceeds 1 byte. Therefore, if the information of the random number value is transmitted to the sub-main substrate 301 as it is (as raw information) for the preliminary determination, the information for identifying which random number is transmitted is transmitted by MODE, and the random number is transmitted. In some cases, a 2-byte command (MODE, EVENT) stored in EVENT must be transmitted twice in order to notify the random number value.

However, as in the present embodiment, by converting the acquired random number value into information indicating the range to which the random number value belongs and transmitting the information to the sub-main substrate 301, the amount of information to be transmitted can be reduced below the number of random number values, and the random Even when the number of numerical values exceeds 256 (1 byte), the attribute of the acquired random number value can be converted into a command with the information amount of 1 byte. It should be noted that a code indicating the fact (for example, indefinite or undetermined) is provided on the main board 102 side in case a situation occurs where the prefetch information is not desired to be transmitted as described later. It is also possible to send a command indicating the code to the sub-main board 301 side.

Here, as the above-mentioned “situation in which it is not desirable to transmit prefetch information”, for example, when the priority digestion side (eg, special map 2 side) during the normal game in the priority digestion type 1+1 type gaming machine is suspended, etc. Can be illustrated. The "priority digestion type" in the above description, for example, prioritizes one of the second game and the first game (here, the second game) over the other (here, the first game) as described above. It means something like that. Further, the "1+1 type gaming machine" in the above description means a gaming machine having a game property in which a plurality of games (here, two) corresponding to the conventional first type pachinko gaming machine are mixed as described above. There is.

In addition, as another "situation in which the user does not want to transmit prefetch information", the non-priority digesting side (for example, the special map 1 side) of the specific game (high base) in the priority digestion type 1+1 type gaming machine is held. The case where it occurs can be mentioned. In addition, as described above, when the priority digestion side (for example, the special map 2 side) is suspended during the normal game in the priority digest type 1+1 type gaming machine, the prefetch effect related to the suspension on the special diagram 1 side is executed. If it is in the middle, the pre-reading effect may be stopped (eg, the reserved image of Toku-zu 1 is changed to red, and then returned to blue), or the like, and vice versa. If a non-priority digestion side (eg, Tokuzu 1 side) is held during a specific game in (high base), even if the lookahead effect related to the holding on the Tokuzu 2 side is being executed, that lookahead The effect may not be stopped (for example, the reserved image of special figure 2 that has been changed to red is maintained as it is). Regarding the touch effect described later, even when the change of the effect related to the look-ahead effect is scheduled, when the look-ahead effect is stopped, the touch effect is set not to be executed. Become.
<Various measures for touch detection>

Next, a description will be given of a utilization method of touch detection that is applicable to the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment and that is related to the operation on the firing handle 20. Here, the “touch detection” generally means that the touch of the human hand is detected by the touch switch 310 (FIG. 4) described above. The "touch detection" is an aspect related to the operation detection of the firing handle (20).

In the present invention, regarding the relationship between the touch detection and the effect output, various control elements (control content determining elements) are examined as described later, and an appropriate control element is adopted from the examined ones. It is supposed to be applied to. Then, such various control elements are appropriately applied to the pachinko gaming machine 10, and effects are executed based on the state of the gaming machine or the detection of the steering wheel operation, so that the operation detection of the firing handle can be effectively utilized. Is assumed.

More specifically, in the present invention, the state of the pachinko gaming machine, before and after the power is turned on, the game is played through the standby state, and the variable display and the stop display (special display) of the special symbol according to the result of the winning/losing lottery (special It becomes a big hit through the variable display and the stop display (the design game related to the production design) of the production design (including the reduced display, etc.) and the big hit game is completed until the game machine is finished. It is regarded as such a series of states. Further, in various states, the presence or absence of touch detection related to the firing handle 20 is assumed, and each state or situation is further subdivided to examine the presence or absence of production output and its contents.

Then, depending on which of the plurality of types of game states the game state is, whether or not the effect is output upon the touch detection and/or the output on the basis of the touch detection is different. Configured to get. Then, as will be described later, whether or not the effect is output with the touch detection as a trigger, and/or the effect execution condition is determined so that the output with the touch detection as a trigger may be different, and the effect execution condition is set as follows. Indicates which game state among a plurality of types of game states, at which timing the touch detection is performed, and before the timing of the touch detection, the effect operation unit (the operation button 22 that the player can operate, the operation lever). , Conditions such as whether or not a player operation input means such as the cross key 96 has been operated.

And what applied various examination items to Pachinko game machine 10 is grasped as each embodiment. Further, in the following examination, the effect that is performed based on the touch detection (when the touch detection is triggered) is referred to as “touch effect”, but the term “touch effect” is related to the touch detection in terms of control. The meaning of this is a concept that includes things that are easy for a person who sees the effect to understand to be touch effects and those that are difficult to understand. In addition to the touch detection, the “touch effect” may be performed as an effect (shooting detection effect) executed in a situation in which a change in the firing intensity volume is detected.

Further, the control elements and assumptions studied here can be used by allowing those that can coexist on the control of the pachinko game machine 10 to coexist and selecting those that cannot coexist as appropriate. In this way, by considering the combination of various states of the gaming machine and the presence/absence of touch detection as the starting point, the production output and the control processing related to this are examined, and appropriately selected and adopted in the pachinko gaming machine, the touch detection is performed. It becomes possible to perform the production output by making maximum use of the steering wheel operation including, and it is possible to utilize the steering wheel operation more effectively.

As described above, in studying the utilization method of touch detection in this way, as shown in FIG. 22, elements can be considered in order to determine the relationship between touch detection and effect output at the design stage. At the left end (front side) of the charts in FIGS. 22 and 23, “structure”, “game state of gaming machine”, and “touch detection” are classified as control element classifications (study item classifications) related to the relationship between touch detection and effect output. "Production executed based on "," Other processing executed based on touch detection", "Production permission/regulation condition", and "Other 1". Here, the "gaming state of the gaming machine" can also be referred to as, for example, "a gaming state that can occur in the gaming machine" or "a state that can occur in the gaming machine".
<Structure>

Of these, the “Structure” classification item shown at the top of FIG. 22 is a classification based on the equipment configuration for touch detection and the equipment configuration that can be associated with touch detection for control purposes. Then, as the classification of “structure”, it is possible to appropriately select and subdivide what is necessary for possible application measures. Here, as shown in the figure, “touch detection” and “effect button” are used. Will be listed. 22 and 23, each item is attached with an alphabet or a symbol that is a combination of an alphabet and a number. In the example of FIG. 22, the symbol “A” is attached to the “structure” at the top of the table, and “touch detection” and “effect button” below the symbols “A1” and “A2”, respectively. The symbol is attached.

The "touch detection" of the symbol "A1" among these means the configuration required to detect the contact of a human hand such as a player. The item of “A1: touch detection” may include the configuration of the touch switch 310 and the like described above. In addition, the item of “A2: effect button” may include the configurations of the operation button 22 and the cross key 96 described above.
<Game state of gaming machine>

Subsequently, as the items of the above-mentioned "game state of gaming machine" in the next stage, there are roughly "B: normal state" and "C: special state". Then, these "B: normal state" and "C: special state" are both "B: of the gaming machine" in "state before touch change" which means a state before touch detection. It means "normal state" and "C: special state".
<<B: Normal state (state before touch change)>>

Furthermore, "B: normal state" can be divided into "B1: game standby state" and "B2: game in progress state". Among these, "B1: game standby state" means a state in which a special symbol, which is the main game of the pachinko machine in the present embodiment, is changed, and a game such as a special game performed according to the result is not performed. doing. In other words, it is defined as "game standby state" for the sake of convenience even when the opening operation of the electric Chu based on the variation of the normal symbol or the winning of the normal symbol is performed. Further, the "B1: game standby state" includes a state where the customer waiting demo display is being performed after a predetermined time has passed without touch detection, but the "customer waiting demo" is as described above. It can be referred to as a “standby demo”. Further, as the "customer waiting demo", it is conceivable to provide a basic "normal demo" and a special "non-normal demo" as compared to the "normal demo".

Further, "B1: game standby state" is, as shown in the figure, "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)", "B12: game standby B (while symbols are stopped)", "B13: game standby C". (Production/sound etc. setting screen)” and “B14: game standby (power saving)”. Of these, "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)" means a basic standby state in the game standby state, and is a state in which the above-mentioned "normal demo" display is performed.

In addition, it is possible to handle the game standby state in which the variation of the above-mentioned normal symbol is executed separately from other game standby states, and in that case, "B11: Game standby A (normal demo display )" to "B14: game standby (during power saving)" is further subdivided into a standby state (for example, B111: game standby A state, neither normal symbol nor electric Chu is inactive, B112: game standby A state changes normal symbol In the middle, B113: a game standby A state is in operation of the electric chew...) may be defined.

FIG. 33(a) shows an example of effect output displayed on the effect display device (60) in the state of "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)" of these. In FIG. 33(a), the company name of the gaming machine manufacturer/seller (SAMMY) is displayed in most areas of the screen, and the message flow is displayed in the lower message display area 364 appearing at the bottom of the screen (scroll display). Is being done. Examples of the message display include contents such as "touching the steering wheel to change the standby screen and turning on the production button to move to the customization screen." Hereinafter, the standby screen display in the state of "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)" may be referred to as "standby screen A". This “standby screen A” is displayed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on in FIG. 14), the data in the RWM is not normal in S113 (S113: YES), and the process moves to the RWM clear process (S103). Is also displayed. It should be noted that the game standby screen at this time may be changed to the character display of "energized" in Fig. 35(a), and a character display such as "initialized" may be additionally written. A dedicated standby screen corresponding to the above may be provided.

Then, when a touch is detected in the situation as in the example of FIG. 33A, a touch effect as shown in FIG. 34A is performed, and a change in the effect (touch change) based on the touch detection is performed. It is possible to cause it. In the example of FIG. 34A, no change appears in the image display on the effect display device 60, but as shown by additionally adding the speaker mark 376 and the lamp mark 377 on the right side of the figure, audio output and light The output is being done.

Here, the speaker mark 376 and the lamp mark 377 shown in the figure do not indicate that these marks 376 and 377 are displayed on the effect display device 60, and the image display performed on the effect display device 60 is not shown. Separately, it is for schematically showing that a voice output from the speaker (21) and a light output (lamp output) by a predetermined LED are performed. Then, the speaker mark 376 shown in the upper part of the figure indicates that there is sound output by the design image of the note coming out from the speaker, and the lamp mark 377 shown in the middle part of the figure shows that the light bulb is turned on. It shows that light output is performed by the design image of the state.

In addition, a lamp mark 377 shown in parentheses in the lower part of the figure shows a display mode when no lamp output is performed. This lower lamp mark 377 (with parentheses) can be used in place of the middle lamp mark 377 (without parentheses) when light output (lamp effect) as a touch effect is not performed. As for the speaker mark 366, a mark for not outputting may be used. As the speaker mark when there is no sound output, it is possible to use, for example, a design image of a speaker to which no note is added.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), it is also possible to show in the figure that the reach effect is being executed by a lamp mark 378. In this case, the characters "reach effect" and "touch notification LED" are shown in the figure, one lamp mark 378 indicates the presence or absence of the reach effect, and the other lamp mark 377 indicates the presence or absence of the touch effect. Can be shown in a distinguishable manner.

Further, the speaker mark 376 and the lamp marks 377 and 378 described here can be used for explaining the effect combination depending on the presence/absence of voice output or light output even in various game states described below. It is a thing. In the following description, the speaker mark 376 and the lamp marks 377, 378 are not added to the drawings of all screen display examples to indicate the presence or absence of sound output or light output, but if necessary, The speaker mark 376 and the lamp marks 377 and 378 are additionally shown to indicate a combination of effects (effect combination).

Subsequently, the above-mentioned "B12: game standby B (stopped symbol)" is a special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) or the display related to the effect is in the stopped state (here, the fixed stop state), and the next fluctuation Is not performed (there is no hold in neither special figure 1 nor special figure 2), or when a predetermined condition is satisfied (details will be described later, for example, from the display of the standby screen A to the predetermined state). It means the standby state after the elapse of time). Then, when this "B12: game standby B (stopping symbols)" has passed a predetermined period, it is possible to perform control in a mode such as shifting to "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)". ..

FIG. 33(b) shows an example of effect output displayed on the effect display device (60) in the state of "B12: game standby B (stopping symbols)". In the example of FIG. 33(b), numerical symbols “3”, “3”, and “1” are displayed as the symbol element effect symbols described above, and heart symbols are the respective numerical symbols as the aforementioned non-symbol element effect symbols. The effect symbols 190a to 190c are configured in combination. Hereinafter, the standby screen display in the state of "B12: game standby B (stopping symbols)" may be referred to as "standby screen B".

In this “standby screen B”, although the design (here, heart) is displayed for the decorative design (effect design), the number (here, 1 or 3) may be hidden. Further, the numbers may be displayed when the variation start condition is satisfied (=starting screen winning from the standby screen B).

Further, in the lower right of the display area 194, the display corresponding to the display of the effect symbols 190a to 190c can be reduced so as to be inconspicuous and simplified, and can be performed together with the display of the effect symbols 190a to 190c. The reduced effect design display area 361 appears. Further, the first hold number display section 196 and the second hold number display section 197 are adapted to perform hold display of the star design. When a touch is detected in the situation as in the example of FIG. 33B, for example, the touch effect area 362 in which the word “Welcome” shown in FIG. 34B is displayed may appear. It is possible. Then, the touch output can be used as a trigger to change the effect output.

The above-mentioned effect symbols 190a to 190c (decorative symbols), the reduced effect symbol display area 361, and the number-of-holds display sections (196, 197) are provided with display priorities. Here, the display priority order is, from the highest order, the reduction effect design display area 361, the number of reserved display sections (196, 197), and the effect designs 190a to 190c. However, the priority order of this display may be changed according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. For example, when it is changing (during game), the display priority is high in the order of the reduced effect design display area 361, the number-of-holds display section (196, 197), and the effect designs 190a to 190c, but during the change standby. In some cases, the reduction effect symbol display area 361, the effect symbols 190a to 190c, and the number-of-holds display units (196, 197) may be arranged in the order of higher display priority. In addition, when performing a touch effect such that the touch effect area 362 appears during the change of the symbol, at least one of the effect symbols 190a to 190c and the reduced effect symbol display area 361 has a higher display priority than the touch effect. Is also set to be higher.

Further, in the standby screen B, it is possible to display only the first hold number display unit 196 without displaying the second hold number display unit 197 of the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197. It is possible. In this case, it is also possible to move the first reserved number display portion 196 to the left and right center portions in the lower portion of the screen, for example. However, in this case, the standby screen B can be shifted only in the normal probability (low probability) state, and in a specific game state such as a probability change or electric support, a start winning is detected for a predetermined time. Even if it does not exist, it is desirable that it does not move.

It should be noted that the standby screen B, which is the “variable standby screen”, is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 33B, and various modes can be adopted. Also, various touch effects can be adopted. For example, it is possible to display something like the lower message display area 364 illustrated in the standby screen A of FIG.

Further, as another example of the touch effect on the standby screen B, for example, an effect (RTC-related effect) that is performed based on real time using an RTC (real time clock) can be exemplified. And, as the RTC-related effects, for example, effects that are performed by deciding a due date or a season, effects that are determined by determining a time zone of the day, effects that are simultaneously performed by a plurality of pachinko game machines, etc. are illustrated. can do. Further, it is also possible to exemplify an effect or the like in which a scrolling display of a text message indicates that the time zone at that time is in a specific effect mode. It is also possible to output a predetermined BGM as an effect related to the standby RTC.

Further, as another example of the touch effect of the standby screen B, there can be mentioned one using the movable effect member described above. Specifically, it is assumed that the movable effect member is displaced from the initial position and reaches the post-driving position during the game standby state in which the standby screen B is displayed. Furthermore, the movable effect member has a relatively small overlapping portion with the display area (194) of the effect display device (60) at the initial position, and a relatively large overlapping portion with the display area (194) at the driven position. Shall be. Then, the movable effect member may be in a position after driving, and by detecting a change in touch detection there, the accessory may be returned to the initial position. Further, even if the symbol variation starts during the return to the initial position at that time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the return operation of the accessory is not interrupted.

The above-mentioned "B13: Game standby C (setting screen for effect/voice, etc.)" indicates, for example, a standby state in which the player has made settings (environmental settings) such as effect mode, volume, and light amount before starting the game. I mean. At this time, the environment setting menu (customization menu) is displayed, and it is possible to shift to the environment setting screen (environment setting display) of the selected type.

FIG. 33(c) shows an example of effect output displayed on the effect display device (60) in the state of "B13: game standby C (effect/voice setting screen)". In the example of FIG. 33C, a display indicating that the environment has been set and the customization mode has been entered (here, the display is in the upper left corner area). Further, from the top, a menu for power-saving mode on/off, RTC (real-time clock) effect on/off, volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, effect frequency adjustment, and customization mode end menu are arranged in order.

Further, in the example of FIG. 33(c), the volume adjustment is performed by using a volume adjustment meter composed of a plurality of (here, nine) rectangular marks arranged between the letters “small” and “large”. It can be done while the player is watching. Then, the volume is represented by the number of the rectangular marks in the volume adjustment meter which are highlighted.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 33C, the light amount adjustment (which may be brightness adjustment) is performed by a plurality of (five in this case) rectangular marks arranged between the letters “low” and “high”. The player can perform the configured light amount adjustment meter while looking at it. Further, the effect frequency adjustment can be performed while the player is watching the effect frequency adjustment meter composed of a plurality of (9 in this case) rectangular marks arranged between the letters “low” and “high”. It has become. Then, the light quantity and the effect frequency are represented by the number of the reversely displayed rectangular marks in each adjustment meter.

Further, an operation guide display area 363 appears, which indicates that the cursor can be moved by the cross key (96) and the decision operation can be performed by the operation button (22). Further, in the lower message display area 364, a message flow display of "Move the cursor to "end of customization mode" to finish (please)"" is displayed.

Here, the transition to such an environment setting state is performed when, for example, the effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) is operated in the state of the standby screen A shown in FIG. 33(a). You can In the following, the screen display in the state of “B13: game standby C (production/voice setting screen)” is referred to as “display screen C”, “production setting screen C”, “environment setting screen”, “customization screen”, etc. Sometimes referred to. In the present embodiment, the state in which the "display screen C" is displayed is one of a plurality of game standby states.

As the touch effect in the state of "display screen C", for example, it is conceivable that no change appears in the screen display and voice output such as "Good luck". In this way, the touch effect can be minimized by changing the screen display without changing the screen display and performing the touch effect with the other output elements such as voice output. It is possible to prevent things that hinder it. As a result, the player can quickly and accurately set the environment while diversifying the touch effect. It is also conceivable to combine a touch effect with a predetermined light output.

Although it is possible to perform a touch effect by screen display, it is possible to prevent a player from having an unexpected impression due to a combination with the environment setting, and a suppressed display mode (small, thin, It is considered desirable to perform a touch effect by displaying an image in a display mode such as inconspicuous.

The above-mentioned "B14: game standby (during power saving)" means a standby state while the processing for power saving is executed. As the processing for saving power, in the example of the “display screen C” in FIG. 33(c), it is possible to make a transitionable state when the power saving mode is turned on. In "B14: Game standby (during power saving)", for example, staging output such as displaying the characters "power saving" on a black background can be illustrated.

As the touch effect in the state of "B14: game standby (during power saving)", for example, the state control during the power saving is canceled, and from the effect of "B14: game standby (during power saving)" to another state ("standby screen It is conceivable that the state shifts to the production related to the “B” state or the like). Furthermore, it is conceivable that the touch effect is further executed in the state after the transition (here, the state of “standby screen B”).

It is conceivable that the above-mentioned "B2: playing state" includes items of "B21: symbol variation state" and "B22: hitting state". Among these, the "B21: symbol variation state" can be a state in which the display relating to the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) or effect is changing. As an example of production output related to "B21: symbol variation state", one in which all the production symbols 190a to 190b are changing as shown in FIG. 8A, or shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B. As such, some of the effect symbols (190a, 190c) are in a stopped (temporary stop) state, and the other effect symbols 190b are in a changing state.

Here, FIG. 37(a) shows a state in which normal reach has occurred, and FIG. 37(b) shows a state in which SP (super or special) reach has occurred. Further, in the SP reach screen shown in FIG. 37(b), the left and right effect symbols 190a, 190c are moved to the upper left portion or the upper right portion of the screen and reduced, and a predetermined character appears and a reduced effect symbol display. On the upper part of the area 361, the notice image by the sun mark 381 appears at the lower right end of the screen. The sun mark 381 in the example of FIG. 37( b) is displayed as a shape in which the image object of the fluctuation information display 198 in FIG. 37( a) has moved and changed its form.

As the touch effect during the normal reach shown in FIG. 37(a), for example, the touch effects shown in order in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b) can be exemplified. That is, before the touch detection, the reach effect by the image display and the reach sound are output as shown by the speaker mark 376 emitting a note and the lit lamp mark 378 in FIG.

Then, when the touch is detected, as shown by the speaker mark 376 in FIG. 40B, the voice output (the output of the touch sound) indicating that the touch is turned on is performed in addition to the reach sound as the voice output. .. An example of the touch sound is a voice output having a content such as “I can't expect it” which suggests the reliability of the reach variation during execution. Further, as shown in a mode in which the lamp mark 377 related to the touch notification LED is turned on, light output for touch effect is performed.

Subsequently, as a touch effect during the SP reach shown in FIG. 37(b), for example, the player releases the firing handle (20), and a state change from a state with touch detection to a state without touch detection (touch detection " It is possible to exemplify a case where a character utters a predetermined line (speech) when a "change of state from "present" to "absent" is detected. In the example of FIG. 37( b ), the balloon region 382 appears and the character “HOT!” is displayed. Furthermore, this touch effect is executed as a high-reliability effect that suggests that the degree of expectation related to the jackpot and reach development is relatively high, and it is easy to appear in the case of a jackpot.

Also, during SP reach, when the player releases the firing handle 20 and then grasps the firing handle 20 again, a touch such as the character display of "heat!" shown in FIG. 37(b) is made. It is also possible to execute an effect. In this case, it can be said that the touch effect is executed when the state change from the touch detection “absence” to “presence” is detected.

Further, the “B22: hitting state” can be a state in which a hit such as a big hit occurs and a game related to the hit is being executed. More specifically, the "B22: hitting state" is, for example, after a big hit start demonstration for notifying that a big hit game is started is displayed, and after a game involving opening the big winning opening, It is possible to perform until the end of the production of the big hit end demo.

Examples of the effect output related to the "B22: hitting state" include those shown in FIGS. 37(c) to 39. For example, FIG. 38(a) shows a screen display example at the time of a big hit start demonstration. At the time of this big hit start demonstration, the characters “BONUS” indicating the occurrence of big hits and a predetermined character are displayed in the center of the screen, and the reduction effect design display area 361 displays a combination of symbols related to the big hit (here, “333”). )) is displayed. Further, in the example of FIG. 38(a), a reserved number display area 367 is shown which distinguishes the reserved numbers of special figure 1 and special figure 2. Further, in the example of FIG. 38(a), as described above, the right-handing guide display area 383 is displayed as an effect for prompting the player to right-hand, and the "turn the handle to the right" is displayed in the right-handing guide display area 383. Is displayed.

Here, regarding the above-mentioned reduction effect design display area 361, during the change of the decoration symbol (effect symbols 190a to 190c), the variable display by the reduced decoration symbol (reference numeral omitted) is also performed in the reduction effect symbol display area 361. However, even if the decorative symbols (effect symbols 190a to 190c) are in the reach state, it is possible to prevent the reduced decorative symbols (mini symbols) in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 from reaching the reach state. Further, in this case, with respect to the three reduced decorative symbols in the reduced effect symbol display area 361, it is possible to set the display mode to either one of all changed and all stopped. Is.

Further, the reduced decorative design in the reduced effect design display area 361 can be displayed also during the big hit (here, the period including all the big hit start demo to the big hit end demo) and the normal demo display (in the standby screen A). Is possible. Then, when the reduced decorative design is displayed during the big hit, it is possible to display the reduced decorative design (for example, in the same combination) corresponding to the decorative design that triggered the big hit. Further, when the reduced decorative design is displayed during the normal demo display, the reduced decorative design corresponding to the decorative design (effect design 190a to 190c) that has been stopped when shifting to the normal demo display is displayed. It is possible.

FIG. 38(b) shows an example of the round screen displayed during the big hit game. In the example of FIG. 38(b), as described above, the story development in which the predetermined characters appear is displayed in the center of the screen, and in the lower part of the screen, in addition to the reduction effect design display area 361 and the hold number display area 367. A round number display area 368 and a count number display area 369 are displayed on the screen.

38(c) and 39(a) to (c), as described above, the hitting-specific effect screens A to D, which are the specific effect outputs during hitting, are illustrated. Among these, the hitting specific effect screen A shown in FIG. 38(c) is an effect to be executed in the seventh round of the big hit game, and the overall image of the big hits generated from the seventh round to the eighth round. An effect that suggests or informs (whether or not a probability variation game is given after a big hit) is executed.

On this hitting-specific production screen A, images of answer sheets in the tests of the two characters "Aoi Kannazuki" and "Haruka Minazuki" are displayed. Furthermore, the character "65" is displayed as the test score for one of the characters, "Aoi Kannazuki", while the test score is still displayed for the other character, "Haruka Minazuki". It has not been done. In this way, the state in which the score of "Haruka Minazuki" is not yet displayed is that the overall image of the big hit that has occurred (for example, whether or not the probability variation game is given after the big hit) is still transmitted to the player. However, it is unclear to the player whether or not the game can be played in a relatively advantageous state.

Then, if there is a touch detection during the round (7 rounds in this case) at this time, in the example of FIG. 39A, “100” is displayed as the score of the test of “Haruka Minazuki” triggered by the touch detection. (Specific performance screen B during hit). As shown in FIG. 39(a), the state in which "100" is displayed as the score of the test of "Haruka Minazuki" is a state in which the player expects to play the game in a relatively advantageous state. Has become. That is, in the example of FIG. 39(a), a touch effect (an effect in which the score notation of "100" appears) accompanying touch detection is performed, thereby effecting an effect that encourages the player to expect a gaming state. Has been done.

In contrast to this performance, if a numerical value exceeding the score of "Aoi Kannazuki" (here "65") is not displayed as the score of the "Haruka Minazuki" test, a revival performance is performed after that. Unless otherwise, the player is informed that the game cannot be played in a relatively advantageous state. If there is no change in the touch detection, the test score of "Haruka Minazuki" is not displayed in the relevant round. It should be noted that it is also possible to express the score of "Haruka Minazuki" when the player once releases the firing handle (20) to change the state from "presence" to "absence" of touch detection. In addition, after the touch detection “Yes” is changed to “No”, the firing handle (20) is further gripped to return the touch detection “Yes” to the “Minamizuki Haruka” score. It is also possible to allow it.

Subsequently, when the big hit game of the seventh round is finished, the hitting specific effect screen C shown in FIG. 39(b) is displayed, and the effect indicating the shift to the eighth round is executed. In the example of FIG. 39(b), the number of rounds of the next big hit game is notified by displaying "Round 8" in the production showing the story development. These effects are, as mentioned above, "effects that fuel the expectation that the player will play the game in a relatively advantageous state", but as a relatively advantageous state and a disadvantageous state, it is a big hit. Examples of the game state to be shifted after the game is “advantageous state: probability changing state/disadvantageous state: non-probability changing state” and “advantageous state: electric support state/disadvantageous state: non-electric support state”.

In addition to the role of suggesting an advantageous state in this way, the role of suggesting the expected number of prize balls that can be obtained in the current big hit game may be used. That is, if the score is "100", the big hit round is 10 rounds, and if the score is "65" or less, the big hit round is 8 rounds.

Further, it may be a role of suggesting whether or not the in-holding game is performed (=whether or not there is a big hit hold among the holds held during the big hit). That is, if the score notation is “100”, it means that the in-hold holiday cottage will be held, and if the score notation is “65” or less, it means that the hold-in-door villa will not be held. Also good.

FIG. 39C shows an example of the effect display in the eighth round. In the example shown in FIG. 39(c), the score of "Aoi Kannazuki" is "65" and the score of "Haruka Minazuki" is "100". This display mode shows that the player can play the game in a relatively advantageous state. In the eighth round, unlike the effects of the seventh round, regardless of whether or not there is a change in touch detection, an overall image of the big hit (for example, whether or not a probability variation game is given after the big hit) is suggested. The display mode will be shown. In this way, by changing the touch detection in the seventh round, an overall image of the big hit (for example, whether or not a probability variation game is given after the big hit) is suggested in advance as compared with the case where the touch detection is not changed. In this way, it is possible to provide a new game property during a big hit that the game information can be quickly known by the player's handle operation (whether or not the touch is detected).

Then, when the big hit game of the number of rounds according to the kind of big hit ends, the big hit end demonstration screen as shown in FIG. 37(c) is displayed. Then, when shifting from the state of the big hit game to the state of the subsequent game, the display of the big hit end demonstration screen ends, and the display shifts to the effect display in a mode according to the subsequent game state.
<<C: Special state (state before touch change)>>

As the above-mentioned "C: special state", "C1: power failure state", "C2: power failure recovery state", "C3: setting change (probability change) state", "C4: setting display (1 to 6) ) Medium state". Among these, “C1: power cut state” means a state in which the voltage supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 (here, particularly the main board 102) is lowered and power is cut off.

Further, this "C1: power-off state" can be provided with items such as "C1B1: game standby state (normal demo display)" and "C1B12: playing state". Of these, “C1B1: game standby state (normal demo display)” can be considered as the same as the above-mentioned “B1: game standby state”.

Specifically, for "C1B1: game standby state (normal demo display)", "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)" of "B1: game standby state", "B12: game standby B (symbol stop) It is possible to perform itemization such as "middle)", "B13: game standby C (setting screen for effect/voice, etc.)", and "B14: game standby (power saving)". Here, in order to prevent the chart from becoming complicated, the illustration of the subdivided items regarding “C1B1: game standby state (normal demo display)” is omitted.

The above-mentioned “C1B12: in-game state” can be considered as the same as the above-mentioned “B2: in-game state”. Specifically, for "C1B12: playing state", it is possible to perform item classification such as "B21: symbol variation state" or "B22: hitting state" of "B2: playing state". .. Here, in order to prevent the diagram from becoming complicated, the illustration of the subdivided items of "C1B12: in-game state" is omitted. Then, in various states related to the “C: special state” described here, various states are set until a touch is detected or a predetermined condition (e.g., elapsed time) is satisfied after the touch is detected. Touch effect is not executed.

The above-mentioned "C2: power failure recovery state" means a state in which the voltage supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 (here, especially the main board 102) is recovered and the power failure is resolved. In this "C2: power failure recovery state", the same "C2B1: game standby state (normal demo display)" and "C2B2: in-game state" may be provided as in the above-mentioned "C1: power failure state". it can.

FIG. 35(a) shows an example of effect output related to the state of "C2B1: game standby state (normal demo display)". In FIG. 35(a), the power failure recovery notification area 365 appears in the upper right corner of the display content (standby screen A) in the above-mentioned "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)", and "energized" Is displayed.

FIG. 35B shows a display example relating to the state of “C2B2: playing state”. In the example of FIG. 35(b), the central message display area 371 appears in the central portion of the image where the display areas of the effect symbols (190a to 190c) appear, and "I energized. The symbol is changing now. You can play the game.” The message is displayed in 3 rows. That is, in the example of FIG. 35(b), the power supply is cut off during the change of the design, and then the power is restored without the operation of clearing the RWM (there is the power supply restoration), and the effect design (190a to 190c) The screen display in the state in which the display area is displayed shows a state in which a message display relating to energization is added and restarted.

As the production output mode after this, depending on the information content transmitted by the command at the time of restoration from the power interruption as described above, restart from the variable display of the production symbols (190a to 190c), with a predetermined stop symbol. Various modes can be adopted, such as restarting from the stop display of the effect symbols (190a to 190c).

Here, even if there is a touch detection, the touch effect in such a state related to the recovery from the power failure is not performed until the initialization notification performed at the time of power-on ends. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the touch effect from functioning as a misunderstanding for the game hall clerk or the player with respect to the initialization notification. As an initialization notification at the time of power-on, it is possible to exemplify displaying the characters "Power is being turned on. Please wait for a while."

The above-mentioned “C3: setting change (probability change) state” means that the setting change is in the state of being changed. In addition, the above-mentioned “C4: setting display (1 to 6) state” means a state in which the numerical value of the set value changed by the setting change operation is being displayed. As described above, in the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the set value changes in the range of 1 to 6, and the setting display 701 displays a numerical value corresponding to the set value.

As an example of the effect output related to the "C3: setting changing (probability changing) state", as shown in FIGS. 36(b) and 36(c), the characters "setting changing" and "setting displayed" are displayed. A thing like a display can be illustrated. In the production output example of FIG. 36( b ), the message “The setting is being changed. After the setting is changed, the frame door is closed to shift to the normal game.” is displayed in the lower message display area 364. .. In the production output example of FIG. 36(c), a lower central message display area 370 appears at the lower center of the screen, and “the setting is being changed in the center. After the setting is changed, the frame door is closed to shift to the normal game. Message is displayed in the flow.

The "setting change" here means that the current setting value is displayed and the setting can be changed, and the "setting display" means that the current setting value is displayed. However, it means that the settings cannot be changed. More specifically, in “during setting display”, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder (809) and the set value at that time is displayed on the setting display (807). It is in a state where the processing for can not be performed. This corresponds to the process when it is determined in the setting change process illustrated in FIG. 16 that the RWM clear switch has not been input (S133: NO).

It should be noted that the image touch effect is not executed in any of the “setting changing” and “setting display” states. Further, in the present embodiment, the image showing the state is displayed during the state, but the image may not be displayed at all.
<Production performed based on touch detection>

Subsequently, as the items of the above-mentioned "effects to be executed based on touch detection", there are roughly "D: content of touch effects" and "E: selection criteria of touch effects". Among these, “D: Content of touch effect” includes an item indicating items such as how and through which device the effect related to the touch operation (touch effect) is performed. Further, “E: Touch effect selection criterion” includes items indicating items such as what kind of item is used to select a plurality of various touch effects.
<<D: Contents of touch production>>

The above-mentioned “D: content of touch effect” can be divided into, for example, “D1: output destination of effect”, “D2: effect data”, and “D3: only change state”. Further, among these, “D1: output destination of effect” can include “D11: speaker”, “D12: lamp”, and “D13: image display device”. The "D11:speaker" can be the one that uses the above-described speaker 21, and the "D12:lamp" can be the one that uses various LEDs for presentation. Note that the output destinations of the touch effect are listed here, but the points such as which output destinations are used in which combination in each state of the gaming machine will be described later.

Further, the “D13: image display device” may be one using the effect display device 60 (including the case where a plurality of display bodies are used). Furthermore, for “D13: image display device”, items such as “D131: same as decorative pattern display device” and “D132: different from decorative pattern display device” can be provided.

Among these, "D131: same as the decorative symbol display device" is a touch effect by an image using the same display device as the effect display device 60 that displays the above-described effect symbol 190 (FIGS. 8A and 8B). It means to do. It can be said that the effect output accompanying the touch detection as shown in FIG. 34B and the like belongs to the category of “D131: same as the decorative symbol display device”. Further, “D132: Separate from decorative pattern display device” means a display device provided separately from the effect display device 60 (for example, a second liquid crystal display device such as one provided in a frame or an LED display device (illustrated). (Abbreviation) etc.) is used to mean that the touch effect is performed.

Regarding the above-mentioned "D2: effect data", it is possible to provide items such as "D21: shared with other things" and "D22: dedicated". Of these, “D21: Shared with other things” means that the effect data for touch effect is shared with effect data for effects other than touch effect. Further, "D22: dedicated" means that the effect data for the touch effect is dedicated and is not shared with the effect data for effects other than the touch effect.

Here, "shared with effect data" may include a mode in which some effect data is shared and other effect data is not used. In addition, a part of the effect data for touch effects is shared with the effect data for other effects, and the other effect data for touch effects is dedicated. Is possible.

For example, the character display of "Welcome" in the touch effect area 362 illustrated in FIG. 34B can be considered to use effect data dedicated to touch effect. Further, for example, when the image data that is used during the change of the symbol is also used as the touch effect, the effect data can be considered to be shared.

The above-mentioned “D3: Only change state” means, for example, when a touch is detected, only the production mode is changed, and no special production is performed as the touch production, or the appearance frequency of the touch production. It is possible to exemplify an effect mode in which a few so-called rare characters or scenes are not made to appear. Further, it can be said that such "D3: only change the state" is an example of a production mode in which "D2: production data" is "D21: shared with other things".
<<E: Selection criteria for touch production>>

Next, the aforementioned “E: Touch effect selection criterion” will be described. In other words, the "E: touch effect selection reference" is a reference for selecting what kind of touch effect is to be executed, and broadly includes whether or not the touch effect is executed. And, regarding such "E: selection criteria of touch effect", for example, "E1: game state (at touch timing)", "E2: number of operations", and "E3: customization setting" can be considered separately. it can. Of these, "E1: game state (at touch timing)" means an effect mode in which the touch effect to be selected or selected is different depending on the game state when the touch is detected. There is.

Further, as "E1: game state (at touch timing)", "E11: game state related to payout" and "E12: game state not related to payout" can be mentioned. Furthermore, as "E12: game state not related to payout", "E121: RTC", "E122: demo type (B1 type)", "E123: abnormal/error state", "E124: production button" "Operation" and the like.

Here, it can be said that the above-mentioned “E11: gaming state associated with payout” is one of the states obtained by subdividing the above-mentioned “B2: gaming state” (FIG. 22). Specifically, the "B2: playing state" includes the items of "B21: symbol variation state" and "B22: winning state" as described above, but these states include a big hit state and a high hit state. A game state in which more balls are thrown out than in a normal state, such as a probability state or an electric support state, is included.

"E121: RTC" related to "E12: game state not related to payout" is to select whether or not to execute the touch effect and the execution content of the touch effect based on the RTC (real time clock) that measures the real time. For example, when it is determined that the touch detection changes at the timing when the RTC time measurement result is in the predetermined time zone, the touch effect corresponding to the time measurement result is determined. ing. Further, "E122: type of demo (type of B1)" is which type of demo among the various types of demo (B11 to B14) in the above-mentioned "B1: game standby state". With reference to, a touch screen effect is determined.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned “E123: Abnormal/error state” means what happens when a state that is difficult to consider normally occurs, or when an abnormality or error is detected when there is a touch detection. This means an effect mode in which a touch effect is selected depending on whether an abnormality or an error has occurred. Furthermore, as this "E123: abnormal/error state", it is usually difficult to consider "E1231: In case of touch state from power-on" or "E1232: In case of entering in non-touch state", for example, winning. An unpredictable state or the like can be defined as a selection criterion parameter. Then, as a state in which a prize cannot be expected, a touch detection is performed from a starting point at a predetermined time after the power is turned on or a predetermined time at the time of displaying the standby screen, and from the starting point to the entry timing after the starting point. It is possible to exemplify the situation where it is not.

Further, in consideration of the maintenance of the game machine, in the case where the game hall clerk opens the glass door (15) and manually gives a prize directly to the starting winning opening (62 or 63) without operating the firing handle (20). There is. Even in such a case, a command is transmitted from the main board (102) to the sub-main board (301), and an effect is executed in the same manner as a normal game is being executed. Then, when a touch is detected during the variable display of the symbols, an effect corresponding to the state is output. It can be said that such a state is also included in the above-mentioned “state in which winning is not expected”.

The above-mentioned “E1231: In the case of being in a touch state after power-on” means a situation in which the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on while the touch sensor (touch switch 310) is being touched. In such a situation, even if the firing handle (20) is touched before the power is turned on, touch detection is not continued due to the power being cut off before the power is turned on. Can be turned off. Alternatively, since such a situation can be considered to be an abnormal power-on situation, it is also possible to perform an effect output for notifying that the power is not normally activated.

Further, in the case of "E1232: When entering a ball in a non-touch state", a ball entering any of the ball entrances (winning holes) is detected in a situation where the touch sensor (touch switch 310) is not detected. It means such a situation. For example, as such a situation, it is possible to consider a case where there is a fraud associated with power-on. Then, in such a situation, it is conceivable to perform an effect output for notifying that the power supply is started up abnormally.

The above-mentioned “E124: Operation of effect button” means a situation in which the operation button 22 is operated and touch detection is further performed. For example, the type of touch effect (effect executed based on touch detection) depending on whether or not the operation of the effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) is performed before execution of the touch effect (within a predetermined period before execution). It is possible to exemplify a control mode in which the presence or absence of execution is determined.

More specifically, when the effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) is not operated within a predetermined period (a few seconds before) before the touch is detected, the touch effect by the image or the sound is executed, and the effect button (the operation button). 22 etc.) is operated, the touch effect is executed only by voice, or the touch effect is not executed.

The above-mentioned “E2: number of operations” means an effect mode in which the touch effect is selected based on the operation when the touch operation is repeated a plurality of times within a predetermined period. Furthermore, "E3: customization setting" means a production mode in which a touch production is selected based on the contents of customization performed by the environment setting described above.

Regarding the "effects that are executed based on touch detection" as described above, when performing various processes based on touch detection, payouts of prize balls and symbol games (for stop results of special symbols and decorative symbols) It can be considered that it is preferable not to affect the progress itself of the game for giving a profit).
<Other processing executed based on touch detection>

Next, the items of the above-mentioned "other processing executed based on touch detection" are roughly "F: change of effect state", "G: change of effect", and "H: trigger parameter of touch effect". Can be mentioned.
<<E: Selection criteria for touch production>>

Among these, “F: change of effect state” can be defined as “F1: accompanied by change of effect state” or “F2: not accompanied by change of effect state”. Then, examples of the "F1: accompaniment of the effect state change" effect mode include "F11: complete transition" and "F12: return after a certain period of time * stay for a certain period of time after the operation effect".

The above-mentioned "F11: complete transition" means a production mode in which the production state is not returned to the original production state unless the production state change lottery is won after the production state is changed. Further, the above-mentioned "F12: Return after a certain period of time * Stay for a certain period of time after the operation effect" means that after the effect state is changed, the effect state after the change remains for a predetermined time, and when the predetermined time elapses. This means an effect mode that returns to the original effect state.

As the above-mentioned "F2: No change in effect state", not only the effect state is not changed at all, but also an expression mode such as "F21: No change in effect state under a specific situation" can be exemplified. .. As the production mode of "F21: No change in production state under specific circumstances", under a specific situation that is predetermined (or selected by lottery), the production state is changed even if there is touch detection. A performance mode such as not performing and not performing can be mentioned.
<<G: Change of production>>

The above-mentioned "G: change of effect" shows what kind of effect is changed based on the touch detection, and "G1: change of effect that does not affect the payout" and "G2: It can be divided into "changes in production that affect the outcome". The term "affects the payout" as used herein refers to other effects such as a change in the execution control state of the notification effect that is advantageous to the player such as a notification of hitting or the like, which directly affects the payout. , The variation time occupied within a certain time varies depending on the variation time, and the variation efficiency also includes an indirect variation.

In other words, if the fluctuation time is short on average, it is possible to relatively increase the number of fluctuations within a fixed time (for example, one hour), and theoretically, the payout amount including the time of a general winning or the time of a big hit can It is expected to increase. On the contrary, if the fluctuation time is long on average, the number of fluctuations within a fixed time is relatively small, and theoretically, the amount of coins to be discharged is considered to be small. The above-mentioned “G1: change of effect that does not affect the payout” and “G2: change of effect that affects the payout” are defined based on such an idea.

And, "G1: change of effect that does not affect payout" can be said to be change that does not change the variation time on the sub-main substrate 301 side, but "G1: change of effect that does not affect payout" As for "G11: change of notice system" including change of production mode and change of frequency, "G12: change of background/character, etc.", "G13: change of decorative pattern (including those accompanying the pattern)" , "G14: change of hold display" and the like can be considered.

As the above-mentioned "G11: change of notice system", change related to "G111: pre-read notice", change related to "G112: advance notice of change", "G113: change of selection ratio", "G114: change of selection content" *It is not just frequency.” Then, the change related to “G111: Look-ahead notice” means that a notice effect in a change after the change (the change) at that time is selected based on the touch detection. Further, the change related to “G112: advance notice of change” means that the effect of the advance notice in the change (change concerned) at that time is selected based on the touch detection.

FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b) show an example of effect relating to "G112: advance notice of change" of "G11: change of advance notice system". FIG. 41(a) shows an example of an effect display before the advance notice of the touch effect (touch advance notice) is executed, and FIG. 41(b) shows an example of the effect display when the touch advance notice is given. ing. Of these, in FIG. 41(a), a cat character 384 holding a fish in the normal reach is made to appear in the center reach of the screen as an expectation suggestion effect that suggests that a big hit may occur due to fluctuations during execution. , The expectation level is different depending on the color and type of the fish that the cat character 384 has caught, and the color and type of the fish depending on the progress of the design such as the screen switching timing after the reach and the passage of time ( The degree of expectation of the notice) is configured to change gradually.

In this state, if there is no change in the touch detection, the cat character 384 is moved to the left side of the screen according to the content determined when the notice content is determined, according to the progress of the above-described symbol. The expectation suggesting effect is executed so as to change (or not change) the color of the fish. On the other hand, if the touch detection changes after the cat character 384 appears, the cat character 384 changes to the monster character 385 (touch change) as shown in FIG. 41B, and the changed monster character is changed. 385 is changed to an effect of moving the screen leftward. At this time, the cat character 384 is changed to the monster character 385 having the degree of expectation (for example, when the fish color is blue, the body color is a blue beast) corresponding to the color of the fish caught.

In addition, if it is planned to change the expectation of the notice according to the progress of the subsequent patterns (the color of the fish is from blue to red, the reliability for each color will be described later), as a privilege due to the change in touch detection When the character changes, it is possible to use the monster character 385 of a color (for example, yellow or red) within the expected degree after the change. Further, as the expectation level of the advance notice, it is possible to provide a plurality of different types of the cat character 384 and the monster character 385, so that the expectation level of the jackpot and the reach development will be different.

For example, as a fish caught by the cat character 384, colored fish such as red, yellow, blue, and white are provided so that the above-described degree of expectation increases in order from white to red, and also for the monster character 385. , The monsters are colored in red, yellow, blue, white, etc., and the above expectations are increased in order from white to red. In addition to this, the size, type, and fish of cats and monsters It is conceivable that the degree of expectation is represented by a combination of a color such as an item associated with the item and the like.

Further, with the touch detection, the color of the fish added by the cat character 384 changes to the one with high expectation, or the color of the monster character 385 that appears by the touch detection changes due to the touch detection from the second time onward. It is possible to perform the effect control so as to generate. It is also possible to adopt an effect control mode in which the color of the monster character 385 changes in sequence by repeating the touch detection from the second time onward. Further, as the notice effect, it is possible to perform the effect control as described above by causing the monster character 385 to appear from the beginning without causing the cat character 384 to appear.

It is also preferable to output a character or voice that teaches that the character may change or the reliability notification may change if there is a change in touch detection. It is possible to promote the experience of a new game effect by operation. Further, as “G11: change of notice system”, after the notice being executed is changed due to the change of the touch detection, a predetermined condition (for example, touch again during the reach after the next change) after the change of the touch detection. The effect using the cat character 384 is the effect using the monster character 385 until a change in the detection, a big hit or the like, a transition to a predetermined game standby demo, etc. are achieved. Is changed to. In addition, based on the change in touch detection, the content that has been changed from the running notice is shown as an example, but when the touch detection changes, notification or suggestion such as "The notice character will be changed from the next change" It is also possible to execute the above procedure and change the corresponding advance notice character or the like from the next change.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned “G113: change of selection ratio” means that the effect drawing is performed so as to change the selection frequency of various effects. In addition, “G114: Change of selection content* Not only frequency” is, in addition to the selection frequency (selection ratio) of various effects, on the sub-main substrate 301 side, effects such as backgrounds and characters used for effects This means that the content (effect constituent element) is changed within a range in which the change time does not change, based on touch detection. In other words, this is a change in which the change time is maintained to the “change of notice due to details of production (specific notice)” which is determined by the sub-control side when executing the same change pattern. It can also be said.

42(a) to 42(d) schematically show an example of a selection table relating to notice effects before and after a touch change. Of these, FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b) show a selection table relating to the notice effect (variation notice effect) about the change result (winning/non-drawing result) at that time, and FIG. (D) has shown the selection table which concerns on the notice production (pre-read notice production) about the variation result (winning result lottery result) after next time. 42(a) and 42(b) show a selection table for a predetermined notice group (here, the notice group α), and FIGS. 42(c) and 42(d) show other predetermined tables. Shows a selection table for the notice group (here, the notice group β).

Further, FIG. 42A shows an example of a selection table for advance notice effect in each change before touch detection, and FIG. 42B shows a selection table for advance notice effect in each change after touch detection. An example is shown. Similarly, FIG. 42C illustrates an example of a selection table related to the prefetching notice effect before touch detection, and FIG. 42D illustrates an example of a selection table related to the lookahead notice effect after touch detection. ..

Note that, here, in order not to complicate the description, each of the notices of FIGS. 42(a) to (d) is one of the notices A to D, and there is a case where these notices are not given. I am supposed to. Further, the symbols "A" to "D" in the advance notices A to D do not indicate the difference in the details of the advance notice, but to distinguish the types of advance notice in the selection tables of FIGS. 42(a) to (d). belongs to.

For example, the use image and effect mode of the notice A shown in FIG. 42(a) are determined not to be the same as the use image and effect mode of the notice A shown in FIGS. 42(b) to (d) in principle. Has been. The same applies to the notice C to the notice D. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the same use image or effect mode may be adopted between the notices having the same symbol (A to D) in each selection table.

Further, taking the chart of FIG. 42A as an example, columns (rows) of 0 to 5, 10 to 30, 31 or more are provided as the variation pattern numbers. For the notice A, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a rate of 40%, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 10 to 40 are selected at a rate of 40%, and the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 31 and above are selected at a rate of 20%. It is like this.

For the notice B, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a rate of 14%, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 at a rate of 35%, and the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 31 and above at a rate of 35%. It is like this. Further, for the notice C, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a rate of 1%, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are selected at a rate of 10%, and the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 31 and above are selected at a rate of 44%. It is like this.

Further, for the notice D, the selection ratio is 0% for any of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30, and the fluctuation patterns of 31 or more. It is designed not to be damaged. Further, as for the ratio of no advance notice, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are 45%, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are 15%, and the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 31 and above are 1%. There is.

The relationship between the fluctuation pattern, the notice, and the selection ratio as described above is defined as follows. That is, here, 100 variation patterns having variation pattern numbers 0 to 99 are provided. The variation pattern numbers 0 to 5, 10 to 30, 31 and above are included in the variation patterns 0 to 99.

Here, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are those of non-reach variation that is a variation that does not reach (for example, the variation pattern random number in FIG. 11A is 15000 to 49999 out of 5000 to 49999). , The fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 6 to 9 are those related to special non-reach fluctuations that are not suitable for the above-mentioned notice group α even though they are also non-reach fluctuations (for example, the fluctuation pattern random number in FIG. 12500 to 14999 of 49999). Furthermore, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are related to reach variations (herein, referred to as “weak SP reach”) that are out of line and have relatively low jackpot reliability (for example, in FIG. 11A). The variation pattern random number is 5000 to 12499 out of 5000 to 49999, and the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 31 to 49 are out of reach and have relatively high jackpot reliability (here, “strong SP reach”). (For example, the variation pattern random numbers in FIG. 11A are 0 to 4999).

Further, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 50 to 99 are those of a variation of hit. The variation pattern numbers 50 to 99 are for reach variation that is indistinguishable from the variation pattern numbers 10 to 49 up to an intermediate stage, and a special hit determination different from the variation pattern numbers 10 to 49. Fluctuations and are included. In order not to complicate the explanation here, the notice A is a “weak notice” with a relatively low jackpot expectation, the notice B is a “medium notice” with a medium jackpot expectation, and the notice C is a jackpot. It is assumed that it is a “weak notice” with relatively high expectations.

Based on these, the selection ratio of the notice group α based on the selection table shown in FIG. 42A will be described. According to the example shown in FIG. 42(a), before the change processing of the notice group selection ratio by the touch detection, the fluctuation at that time (the fluctuation) is a pattern based on the fluctuation pattern 5 (the fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation pattern number is 5). In the case of fluctuation (non-reach symbol fluctuation), the selection ratio of the notice group α has a probability of executing the notice A of 40%, a probability of executing the notice B of 14%, and a probability of executing the notice C of 1%, The probability of not executing the notice of the notice group α is 45%.

Similarly, when the variation is a symbol variation of weak SP reach based on the variation pattern 30 (variation pattern with variation pattern number 30), the selection ratio of the notice group α has a probability of executing the notice A of 40%. The probability of executing B is 35%, the probability of executing the notice C is 10%, and the probability of not executing the notice of the notice group α is 15%.

Similarly, when the variation is a symbol variation (hit variation) based on the variation pattern 31 (strong SP reach) or the variation pattern 50, the selection ratio of the notice group α has a probability of executing the notice A of 20% and the notice B. 35%, the probability of executing the notice C is 44%, and the probability of not performing the notice of the notice group α is 1%.

In the example of FIG. 42(a), since the selection ratio of the variation pattern is determined in this way, the notice A of the notice group α is a case where the non-reach out variation pattern having the highest selection rate is selected. However, it can be said that it is highly likely to be executed (40% of non-reach loss). Therefore, it can be said that the notice A of the notice group α is a notice having a higher expectation of hit than the case without no notice, but an extremely low expectation.

On the other hand, for example, the notice C of the notice group α is extremely unlikely to be executed in the non-reach-off variation pattern with the highest selection rate (1% at the time of non-reach-off), and when the strong SP reach or hit Since it is a notice that is easy to be executed, it can be said that the notice has a high expectation of winning.

The fluctuation patterns having the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 49 have different selectivities at the time of deviation. For example, the rate at which any of the variation patterns 0 to 5 is selected is 80% at the time of loss, and the rate at which any of the variation patterns 6 to 9 is selected is 10 at the time of loss. %. Further, the rate of selecting any of the fluctuation patterns No. 10 to 30 is 9% at the time of deviation, and the rate of selecting any of the fluctuation patterns No. 31 to 49 is 1% at the time of deviation. is there. Further, any of the variation patterns No. 50 to No. 99 is selected only at the time of a hit.

Therefore, for the sake of convenience of explanation, assuming that the hit probability is 1/100, the possibility that the notice A will appear at the time of deviation is 80% of the selected ratio for the fluctuation patterns 0 to 5. , 32% (=80%×40%) by the product of 40% based on the table of FIG. 42(a). Further, for the fluctuation patterns No. 10 to No. 30, the product becomes 3.6% (9%×40%) by the product of 9% of the selected ratio and 40% based on the table of FIG. Further, the variation patterns 31 to 49 are 0.2% (=1%×20%) due to the product of 1% of the selected ratio and 20% based on the table of FIG. 42(a). ..

On the other hand, the possibility that the notice A will appear at the time of winning is 0.2%( due to the product of 1% of the ratios selected for the fluctuation patterns 50 to 99 and 20% based on the table of FIG. 42(a). 1% x 20%). From these facts, the rate at which the notice A is executed for one change is 36% (=32%+3.6%+0.2%+0.2%).

In this way, since only 0.2% of the notice A is selected when the notice A is hit, the reliability is 0 at the time when the notice A appears (when it is not known whether the notice A is hit or lost). It is about 0.4% (=0.2%+0.2%).

On the other hand, after the touch detection, the selection table shown in FIG. 42(b) is used. In this selection table, for the notice A, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are 40%, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are 0%, and the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 and above are 20%. It is supposed to be selected.

As for the notice B, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a rate of 0%, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are selected at a rate of 70%, and the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 31 and above are selected at a rate of 9%. It is like this. Further, with respect to the notice C, the selection ratios of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 and the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 and above are 0%, and it is not selected. It has become.

As for the notice D, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a rate of 0%, the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are selected at a rate of 29%, and the variation patterns of the variation pattern numbers 31 and above are selected at a rate of 70%. It is like this. Further, as for the ratio of no advance notice, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are 59%, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are 1%, and the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 31 and above are 1%. There is.

Then, for example, when the notice B appears in the variation pattern 10 or more, the benefit of the reach or more is confirmed for the player, and the reliability is higher than that of the notice B (the ratio selected at the strong SP reach or the hit). The notice D can be newly selected as an effect. For this reason, after the touch detection, it is possible to change the content and reliability of various types of advance notice selected in the advance notice group α, compared to before the touch detection.

Note that the prefetch notice group β can also have different selection ratios before and after touch detection, as in the notice group α shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b) (FIG. 42(c), (See (d)). Further, in the case of a pre-reading notice described later shown in FIGS. 42(c) and (d), the sub-main board is based on the pre-reading command (having the information of the pre-reading code) which is the advance notice information from the main board (102). The fluctuation pattern number is specified by the CPU 521 of 301.

Note that the selection ratio described here is designed by the designer based on an idea such as what degree of reliability of various types of notice should be set, and is designed in an optimal balance, and is limited to the exemplified values and balance. Not a thing. For example, the numerical values described here may be changed, but the magnitude relationship of the numerical values may be the same as that described here.

The above-mentioned "G12: change background/character etc." means that the background, character, etc. are changed based on touch detection with respect to effects other than the notice type effect. In addition, the above-mentioned “G13: change of decorative design (including those associated with the design)” means that the effect design 190 is made different from the design or classification different from that based on the touch detection. To do. Further, the "things associated with the symbol" may include a portion other than the element symbol design which is the symbol element effect symbol described above (element symbol element which is the non-symbol element effect symbol) and the like.

The above-mentioned "G14: change of hold display" means that the hold display on the first hold number display section 196 and the second hold number display section 197 shown in FIGS. 8(a), 8(b), 33(b), etc. , Is meant to be changed based on touch detection. As the change of the hold display, it is conceivable to change various display modes such as design and arrangement (for example, the round design of FIG. 8A to the star design of FIG. 33). Further, it is also conceivable to change the arrangement of the first reservation number display unit 196 and the second reservation number display unit 197.

Examples of the above-mentioned "G2: change of effect that influences payout" include "G21: change of change pattern (change time)" and "G22: execution of notification (AT system function)". .. Among these, “G21: change of change pattern (change time)” can be considered as “G211: change of selection ratio” or “G212: change of selection content*not only frequency”.

The above-mentioned “G211: Change of selection ratio” means that for various fluctuation patterns that define the fluctuation time, fluctuation pattern drawing is performed so as to change each selection frequency. In addition, "G212: change not only selection content * frequency" changes not only the selection frequency of various fluctuation patterns but also the fluctuation time itself to be selected, and as described above, the selection frequency of various effects (selection In addition to the ratio), on the side of the sub-main substrate 301, it is possible to change the effect contents (effect components) such as the background and characters used for the effect to change the change time based on touch detection. I mean. In other words, this means that the change time is changed to the "change of notice due to details of performance (specific notice)" that is determined by the sub-control side when executing the same change pattern. It can be said that there is.

The above-mentioned "G22: Execution of notification (AT system function)" means that a predetermined notification is executed based on touch detection, and for example, AT is often adopted in a rotating-type gaming machine. It is possible to use touch detection in combination with a game property similar to (assist time).

More specifically, for example, the effect display device 60 presents the operation timing of the touch sensor (touch switch 310), and the touch is detected at the timing so that the effect is developed. Further, notification of the launch direction (such as right-handed or left-handed) that is advantageous to the player, notification of the firing timing (such as "hit!" or "stop!") that is advantageous to the player, or a combination of these. An example may be one that informs a combination of these and a temporal element (such as "start right-handing!" after XX seconds).
<<H: Related to trigger parameters for touch production>>

Among the processes executed based on the touch detection, the above-mentioned "H: related to trigger parameter of touch effect" includes "H1: process of clock timer (addition/subtraction, clear, etc.)" and "H2: touch detection. It is possible to consider processes such as “number of times processing (addition/subtraction/clearing)” and “H3: other”. The “trigger parameter” here means a parameter (element of a predetermined variable) which is calculated or set by the touch detection as a trigger and is related to execution of the touch effect.

More specifically, the above-mentioned “H1: processing of a clock timer (addition, subtraction, clear, etc.)” is used to determine whether or not to enable a touch effect or as an effect trigger (touch effect (touch effect). The processing of a timer value) that determines whether or not to consider the next touch detection as an effective execution timing of the effect when the touch detection is triggered. It means something that adds, subtracts, or clears. For example, as an example corresponding to “specific condition” shown in “whether to execute an effect” (FIGS. 24A and 24B) described later, the operation of the effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) is in the controlled state 1. In such a case, the processing related to the time after the operation of the effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) corresponds to “H1: processing of the clock timer (addition, subtraction, clear, etc.)” here. Will be things.

In the above-mentioned "H2: touch detection frequency processing (addition/subtraction/clear)", processing relating to the number of times of touch detection in a predetermined period is performed, and addition, subtraction, clearing, or the like of the counter value for counting the number of times is performed. It means something. In addition, the above-mentioned "H3: Others" includes trigger parameters other than "H1: processing of clock timer (addition, subtraction, clear, etc.)" and "H2: touch detection processing (addition, subtraction, clear)". It means possible things.

For example, in the above-mentioned “F: change of effect state” or “G: change of effect”, when changing the effect state or effect/variation pattern, the CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301 effects at that time. The process of recognizing and grasping the selection state and updating the information related to the performance is executed, but the process necessary for grasping and updating these is illustrated as corresponding to "H3: Others". You can

More specifically, for example, as a control mode included in the above-mentioned “F21: No change in effect state under specific situation”, it is assumed that touch effect is not executed in four changes after the jackpot. And in such a thing, the process which confirms the number of times of change after the end of a big hit can be illustrated as what corresponds to "H3: other".

In addition to this, in the gaming machine in the control mode in which the touch effect is not executed during the pattern change or the specific effect period, when the touch is detected, the touch effect can be executed (the execution is restricted). It is also possible to exemplify the process of confirming whether or not

Further, with respect to “specific conditions” shown in “whether to execute an effect” (FIGS. 24A and 24B) described later, the effect is executed when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”. Along with this, if the “specific condition” is “under a situation where it is a hit”, the process of determining whether or not the symbol fluctuation currently being executed at that time is a hit is “H3: Others”. It corresponds to ".
<Performance permission/regulation conditions>
<<J: Setting of permission timing>>

Next, the above-mentioned "production permission/regulation conditions" will be described. First, the "production permission/regulation condition" is not only to immediately execute the production based on the touch detection even if the touch detection is changed under each game situation, but also based on the touch detection. Means the conditions used to determine whether to allow the execution of. In other words, it is stipulated that the touch effect is executed as the game state, and in order to execute the effect when there is a change in touch detection in a state where the main effect permission/regulation conditions are satisfied. It has become. And, as an item of "production permission/regulation condition", "J: setting of permission timing" can be mentioned. This "J: setting of permission timing" is a predetermined production or game state triggered by touch detection. It means that the permit conditions and regulatory conditions of are canceled. Furthermore, this "J: setting of permission timing" can be classified into "J1: internal timer" and "J2: compound with other elements".

Among these, as "J1: internal timer", one having "J11: time characteristic (comparison with variable/variation)" can be exemplified. For example, a management timer for managing whether or not the touch effect can be executed (permission) can be provided, and this management timer can be referred to as an “internal timer”. This management timer (internal timer) can be considered to be included in the timing timer in the above-mentioned “H1: processing of the timing timer (addition/subtraction/clearing, etc.)”. By using this management timer (internal timer), it is possible to manage whether or not to execute the touch effect (also referred to as "possible" or "presence or absence") and the restriction of the touch effect (also referred to as "restriction"). Is possible.

Further, regarding this internal timer (management timer), in addition to the one that manages a fixed time, a "variable" one can be considered. As this "variable", for example, it is possible to think of changing the time determined for executing the touch effect according to some condition. The "some condition" may be, for example, a time period during which the execution of the touch effect is allowed to differ between the first detection and the second detection.

In addition, since there is a “comparison with one variation”, a timer (time) for allowing a touch effect can be selected in the gaming machine, or a variation pattern with the longest variation time that can be selected at that time. Also, it is possible to exemplify that a long time is set. It can be said that the determination of the effect output mode based on the touch detection as described above uses the touch detection as a control element for permitting or restricting the output of the effect.

In this case, it is possible to optimize the opportunity to execute the touch effect. That is, in a recent symbol game, as the longest variation time, generally, a symbol variation exceeding 180 seconds (a symbol variation having a high degree of expectation like “Super 1” in FIG. 11) is performed. On the other hand, if the time during which the touch effect is permitted to be executed is not set longer than such time, there is a possibility that the opportunity to execute the touch effect that has been set is lost. Therefore, the opportunity to execute the touch effect is appropriately set by permitting the execution of the touch effect after a lapse of a time shorter than the above-described long time (180 seconds, etc.) based on the relationship with the time of one change. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the touch effect.

The above-mentioned "J2: Composite with other elements" includes "J21: presence/absence of operation of production button", "J22: presence/absence of twisting operation of handle", "J23: command from main board", "J24: game". The state of the machine (condition)” can be divided into items, and means that touch effect is permitted or restricted in combination with one or more of these elements. Among these, “J21: presence/absence of operation of production button” determines a condition for permitting or restricting a predetermined production of a combination of the operation of the operation button (production button) 22 and the touch operation. It is meant as an element for doing.

The above-mentioned "J22: Presence/absence of twisting operation of handle" is a combination of twisting operation of the firing handle 20 and touch operation as a condition of permitting or restricting production, and "J23: Command from main board" is main. It means that the condition of receiving a predetermined command from the substrate 102 to the sub-main substrate 301 and the touch operation is a condition.

Examples of the above-mentioned "J24: state of game machine (status)" include "J241: special state such as abnormality", "J242: game standby state", "J243: specific effect state (subdivided)". be able to. Among these, "J241: Special state such as abnormality" means that there is a touch detection in a state where an error is detected or a special situation in which a situation difficult to occur in normal game occurs. It means something like a condition.

The above-mentioned “J242: game standby state” means that, for example, touch detection in each state in the above-mentioned “B1: game standby state” is used as a condition for permitting and regulating production. .. In addition, the above-mentioned “J243: specific effect state (partitioned)” means that the presence of touch detection in various effect states is a condition for permitting or restricting effect. ing.

For example, in the case of "B1: standby state (normal demo display)", effects are produced according to the effect states "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)" to "B14: game standby (power saving)". Examples of permission and regulation of Also, in the case of "B2: playing state", what permits or restricts the production depending on the production state (which production mode is staying) regarding "B21: symbol variation state". It can be illustrated. Further, in the case of "B22: hitting", the effect is allowed or regulated according to the effect state (effect pattern) being hit, the distinction between the probability change hit and the normal hit, and the number of consecutive games. It is possible to exemplify things that permit or restrict production.

The "permission" and "restriction" described here are not limited to permitting (all permitting) or restricting (all restricting) all elements in the production. For example, depending on the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 10, any one of a plurality of types of effects that may be executed as a touch effect may be permitted (partially permitted) or restricted (partially regulated). It is also possible to

It is also possible to combine this "J2: compound with other elements" with, for example, the above-mentioned "J1: internal timer". In this case, in the game standby state (such as "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)"), the operation button (22) or the like is rendered before a predetermined elapsed time reaches a predetermined time (about 20 seconds). For example, when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time (20 seconds, etc.) even when the operation unit is operated, output of an effect (standby screen B, etc.) triggered by the subsequent touch detection is allowed. it can. Here, if the time required to execute the corresponding touch effect is, for example, 6 seconds, the above-mentioned “predetermined time” executes the touch effect for 6 seconds a predetermined number of times (for example, three times or more). It is conceivable that the period is possible (here, about 20 seconds).

Furthermore, regardless of whether the recovery is a normal recovery operation (recovery in the case of NO in S111 or S113) or a specific recovery operation (recovery operation in the case of YES in S113), the internal timer It is also possible to set the time measurement time of the above to a predetermined value (for example, 20 seconds which is the above-mentioned “predetermined time”).
<Other 1>
<<K: Change in touch state>>

Then, as the above-mentioned "other 1" item, "K: change of touch state", "L: touch detection method", and "M: transmission method to sub" can be mentioned. Of these, “K: change in touch state” means that the presence or absence of contact with the touch sensor (touch switch 310) is utilized for game control. As for “K: change in touch state”, “K1: non-touch→touch” and “K2: touch→non-touch” can be considered.

Among these, “K1: non-touch→touch” means to change from a non-touch state where the touch sensor (310) is not touched to a touch state where the touch sensor (310) is touched. Further, “K2: touch→non-touch” means that the touch state in which the touch sensor (310) is touched is changed to the non-touch state in which the touch sensor (310) is not touched.
<<L: Touch detection method>>

The above-mentioned “L: touch detection method” means that the difference in how the touch is detected is utilized for game control. Then, regarding "L: touch detection method", "L1: touch only" and "L2: handle operation included" can be considered. Of these, “L1: touch only” means that game control is performed only on the condition that the touch sensor (310) is operated. Further, "L2: Including handle operation" means that the game control is performed on the condition that both the operation on the touch sensor (310) and the rotating operation of the firing handle 20 are performed. When “L1: touch only” is adopted for the pachinko gaming machine 10 among these, the touch detection process can be easily performed. Further, when “L2: Including handle operation” is adopted, it is possible to prevent touch production when a player accidentally touches the firing handle (20), for example, and it is more accurate. In addition, it becomes possible to obtain the player's intention to start the game and utilize it for the subsequent processing.
<<M: Sending method to Sub>>

The above-mentioned “M: transmission method to the sub” described above means matters such as in what case the touch signal detected by the main board 102 is transmitted to the sub-main board 301. As for “M: transmission method to sub”, “M1: principle always transmission (main ⇒ sub)” and “M2: transmission while grasping the situation (main ⇒ sub)” can be considered.

Of these, “M1: in principle always send (main ⇒ sub)” is a sub signal from the main board 102 that receives a touch signal (including a signal indicating the content of the touch signal) unless there is a special situation such as a communication error. It means that the data is constantly transmitted to the substrate 301. In addition, “M2: grasp status and transmit (main ⇒ sub)” means that the main board 102 determines the situation at that time, grasps the situation, and then, in a predetermined case, a touch signal ( (Including a signal representing the content of the touch signal) is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301.
<Use form related to change in touch state>
<<Because of performance execution>>

Next, the result of studying a specific form for utilizing the change in the touch state for effect control will be described. FIGS. 24A and 24B are a list of the pros and cons of performance execution when a change in the touch state is detected in various game states. Here, "whether or not to produce" can be paraphrased as "possibility of producing", "presence or absence of producing", and the like.

For example, FIGS. 24A and 24B show “change state”, “number of changes, etc.”, “target”, and “game machine state” from the left of the chart. Of these, the upper part of the “changed state” shows the case where the touch detection changes from the “absent” state to the “present” state, and the lower part of the “changed state” shows that the touch detection changes from the “present” state to the “absent” state. This shows the case where the state has changed.

The above-mentioned “number of changes, etc.” represents an item regarding the number of times the state of the touch signal changes. The "first time" represents the first change of the touch signal, and the "predetermined time and thereafter" represents the state change of the second time and thereafter. Further, the “specific condition” represents a specific condition other than the number of changes, and indicates that the operation button 22 or the like has been operated as an example.

Here, examples of the “state change” and the “change” include a change of the touch signal from the on state (or off state) to the off state (or on state). Further, it is also possible that the intensity of the touch signal (for example, the height of the voltage) is changed stepwise, and the step change is also referred to as “state change” or “change”. In addition, each item such as "first time" in this "number of changes" indicates that the touch detection has changed from "absent" to "present" and that the touch detection has changed from "present" to "absent". The same applies to any of the cases where the state changes to ".

As the above-mentioned "target", "image", "sound", and "lamp" can be considered. The meaning of these items can be the same as "D13: image display device", "D11: speaker", "D12: lamp" of "D1: effect output destination" shown in FIG. .. Further, these items of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are commonly set for each item such as “first time” in “number of changes, etc.”.

As described above, the change in the touch detection includes the change in the case where the player changes from the state in which the firing handle 20 is held to the release state, and the change in the state in which the player holds the firing handle 20 from the state in which the firing handle 20 is not held. There are two cases of change, and there are cases where the operation is performed a plurality of times during a fixed period such as during the same gaming state. Furthermore, a specific condition is satisfied at a timing that cannot be completely predicted, such as a situation in which an effect button (operation button 22 or the like) is operated, and touch detection is performed before or after the situation in which the specific condition is satisfied. May change. Therefore, in the following, the presence/absence of execution and the content of execution are set in the touch effect according to each state of the gaming machine, the change mode of touch detection, whether it is under a specific condition, and the like, and for the determined content, refer to FIG. I will explain.

FIG. 24 shows that, in each state of the gaming machine (shown as “state of gaming machine”), when the touch detection changes in a predetermined manner under normal conditions (non-specific conditions), and when touch detection occurs under specific conditions. When the is changed, the concept of the touch effect to be executed is illustrated. As the above-mentioned “state of the gaming machine”, “setting change relationship”, “waiting for game”, “during pattern change” shown in FIG. 24A, “hit”, and “hit” shown in FIG. In-progress (electric support)”. Among these, the "setting change relationship" defines "setting change in progress" and "setting display in progress" relating to the above-mentioned setting change. The above-mentioned "setting change" represents the situation where the setting change is started and the setting is changed, and the "setting display" represents the situation where the set value is displayed.

Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the symbols “◯”, “Δ”, and “x” are used. Among these, the symbol "○" indicates that the effect by the device listed as "target" is "executed". Further, the symbol "△" means that the effect by the "target" device is "executed (including the concept that it may be executed under certain conditions or executed by only a part of the device)". The symbol “x” represents “do not execute”. Here, the “certain condition” related to the symbol “Δ” represents, for example, only in the case of winning the lottery with a predetermined probability. In addition, as the lottery with a predetermined probability, a lottery in which the winning ratio is different with each set value (FIG. 12) can be exemplified in addition to the lottery in which the common probability is won regardless of the set value.
<<<Setting change relationship>>>

Then, as shown in FIG. 24A, in the state where the state of the gaming machine is “setting change relation” (either of “setting change” and “setting display”), the touch detection is the first time. When "No" to "Yes" or "Yes" to "No" ("First time"), part of the LED ("lamp") provided on the gaming machine frame or gaming board was used. The touch effect is executed (indicated by “Δ”), and the touch effect by the liquid crystal display device (“image”) and the speaker (“voice”) is controlled not to be executed. On the other hand, if the change in the touch state is detected again after the change in the touch state is detected for the first time (indicated as “after the predetermined number of times”), it is only the touch effect by “image” and “voice”. The touch effect using a part of the “lamp” is also configured not to be executed (indicated by “x”). Further, under the "specific condition" such as after the operation of the effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) is being performed during the setting change or the setting display, the touch effect is executed even when the change in the touch state is detected for the first time. It is controlled not to be performed (indicated by "x"). That is, in the setting change state, regardless of the change state of the detection state of the touch detection unit and/or the detection state of the rotation operation detection unit, the output of the effect based on the detection by the touch detection unit may not be performed. It is possible.

As described above, in the example of FIG. 24A, in the case of a setting change state such as “during setting change” or “during setting display”, whether touch detection is performed even if touch detection is performed. Even if it is executed, it is configured so that only the effect of notifying the touch detection is executed. By doing so, the touch effect does not hinder the setting confirmation and the setting change work, and it is possible to confirm whether the touch detection is normally performed even during the setting change work.
<<<< game waiting >>>

Among the above-mentioned “status of gaming machines”, “during game standby” includes “demo screen”, “adjustment screen”, “fluctuation standby screen”, “initialization notification (medium)”, and “abnormality notification (medium)”. Can be mentioned. Of these, the "demo screen" is the display state of the above-mentioned "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)", and the "adjustment screen" is "B13: game standby C (production) related to environment settings (customization) such as volume.・Various standby screen” corresponds to the display state of “B12: game standby B (while symbols are stopped)”.

Further, the "initialization notification" during the above-mentioned game standby means that the initialization notification is in progress, and the above-mentioned "C2B1: power recovery state and game standby state" and subsequent initialization. Corresponds to the status during the notification execution period.

Further, the above-mentioned "abnormality notification" during the game standby state is an error that can restore the control state of the gaming machine to the normal state without restarting the power if an error is released ("recoverable error" etc.) Is possible), and corresponds to the above-mentioned “B1: game standby state” and the state during the execution period of the notification of the recoverable error.

As shown in FIG. 24A, when the touch detection is changed from “absent” to “present” for the first time in the game standby state where the “demo screen” is displayed, “image”, “voice”, The control is performed so as to execute the touch effect using the "lamp" (indicated by "○"). In addition, if the change in the touch state is detected again (after the predetermined number of times) after the touch detection first changes from “absent” to “present” (for each set value). It is controlled so that the touch effect by “voice” is executed based on the provided lottery result based on the winning ratio) (indicated by “Δ”). Furthermore, when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present" for the first time under "specific conditions" such as after the operation of the effect button is performed while the game is displaying the "demo screen". However, the touch effect using the “image” and the “lamp” that is usually performed is not executed, and only the touch effect by voice is controlled (indicated by “Δ”).

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, the touch effect is controlled not to be executed even if the change is “first time” (indicated by “x”). .. In addition, under the same condition, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent” a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two times or more) or after the production button is operated during the game standby. In the same way as when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present", control is performed not to execute the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp" (indicated by "x"). ..

As described above, in the example of FIG. 24A, when the demonstration screen is displayed, the touch effect is executed when the touch detection generated when the game ends is changed from “present” to “absent”. On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”, the touch effect is configured to be executed, and an unauthorized device or the like that forcibly enables the touch detection (for example, a handle and a game island). It is possible to preferably prevent the touch effect from being performed when the devices for connecting the ground wires to each of them so as to be electrically connected to the metal are removed. Further, the game enjoyment can be further improved by executing a touch effect different from usual only when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” under a predetermined condition. Further, in particular, when the touch effect is used as the effect at the time of starting the game, by omitting the touch effect when the player indicates the intention of the game by operating the effect button or the like, it is possible to meet the needs of the player. Execution of production that does not follow can be suppressed.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the example of FIG. 24A, the demo screen display is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the symbol is stopped, in other words, when a predetermined time or more has elapsed after the game was stopped. Since it is a display screen (such as “standby screen A” in FIG. 33A), the situation in which the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent” is extremely limited. Therefore, by not executing the touch effect in the situation, the original meaning of the touch effect, such as indicating that the game is in a state to be started, is never lost.

Further, in the "adjustment screen" in the "game standby" state, when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present" for the first time, the touch effect using the "image" is not executed, The touch effect using "" and the touch effect using a part of the "lamp" are controlled. In addition, if the change in the touch state is detected again after the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” for the first time (after the predetermined number of times), it is only the touch effect using the “image”. Instead, the control is performed so that the touch effect using “voice” or “lamp” is not executed. In addition, when the "adjustment screen" is displayed under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button, the "voice" that is normally performed even when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present" for the first time. , And "lamp" are controlled so as not to execute all the touch effects including the touch effects. On the other hand, in the "adjustment screen" in the "game standby" state, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", whether or not the change is the first time and the change is under a specific condition. Regardless of whether or not there is a touch effect control is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the adjustment screen is displayed, the touch effect is generated when the touch detection that occurs when the game is finished changes from “Yes” to “No” as in the case of the demonstration display. On the other hand, when touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”, touch operation of “image” that is likely to obstruct the adjustment work is not performed, and the adjustment work is relatively unaffected. The touch effect by “voice” or “lamp” is configured to be executed, and both the adjustment work and the touch effect can be appropriately executed. Also, unlike "during demo display", even if multiple touch detections are made, multiple touch productions are not performed on the adjustment screen. No output or lamp output is executed, and the most important adjustment work is not hindered while the adjustment screen is displayed. Furthermore, when the operation of the effect button is used for the adjustment work, when the adjustment work is started, the touch effect is not executed thereafter, and thus the most important adjustment work is hindered while the adjustment screen is displayed. Never.

Then, when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present" for the first time on the "variation standby screen" in the "game standby" state, the touch effect using "voice" and the "lamp" The touch effect using a part is executed, and under a predetermined condition (which will be described later in detail, in the case of a variation standby screen when the demo screen is changed), the touch effect using “image” is controlled to be executed. In addition, after the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present" for the first time, a change in the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times) or after the production button is operated. While the "variation standby screen" is being displayed under the conditions, the touch effect using the "image" and "lamp" is not executed, and the effect of the "voice" is under a certain condition (for example, a lottery with a predetermined probability). It is controlled so that it is executed in (winning).

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, the touch effect using the “image” is not executed, but under certain conditions (for example, winning of a predetermined probability lottery). Control is performed so as to execute a touch effect using (a part of) "voice" or "lamp". In addition, even after the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” for the first time, if a change in the touch state is detected again (after the predetermined number of times), the touch detection is performed under certain conditions (for example, the touch detection is not performed for the first time). It is controlled so that the touch effect using (voice) or (a part of) the “lamp” is executed in a lottery with a lower probability than if it was performed. On the other hand, while the "variation standby screen" is displayed under a specific condition such as after the operation of the effect button, the touch effect using the "image" and "lamp" is not executed, and the effect of the "voice" is , Control not to execute the touch effect.

In this way, unlike when the “demo screen” is displayed, even when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” during the display of the “variable standby screen”, under certain conditions some of the effects of the “image” etc. It is configured not to execute the effect of, and it is easy to stay while the game is interrupted for a short time after the game is stopped, for example, when the player lights a cigarette or drinks The effect of the touch effect is reduced compared to the normal demonstration screen to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when the game is restarted. On the other hand, the variable standby screen often shifts immediately after the game ends, so if the player interrupts the steering wheel operation, he/she will not encourage the “depressing” too much and the “I want you to continue the game” It is preferable to execute the effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the situation, by not performing the touch effect by the "image" and performing the effect by the "sound" and "lamp", "do not promote the indulgence" and "continue the game" The performance is performed in consideration of the balance of both "I want to do". It should be noted that it is also possible to carry out with respect to the “image”, and in that case, it is preferable to execute the effect display including the content for suppressing the “inset”.

Further, in the “initialization notification” in the “waiting for game” state, when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” and when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” Regardless of the status of “number of changes, etc.” (whether it is the “first time” or the second time and thereafter), control is performed so that none of the effects “image”, “voice”, and “lamp” are executed. To do. In addition, regardless of whether or not the effect button or the like is under a specific condition, control is performed such that none of the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp" is executed.

In this way, during the "initialization notification" in the "waiting for game" state, the touch effect is executed when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present" or "present" to "absent". It is configured so that it is meaningless or extremely meaningless under the condition that the player does not normally operate the steering wheel, that is, the initialization notification after the power is turned on (power-on notification in a broad sense). By not performing the above, it is possible to reduce power consumption at the time of initialization, suppress noise in the game shop, and reduce discomfort to the operator. Even in this state, for example, a minute effect process such that a change in the touch detection state such as a part of the “lamp” can be confirmed, in other words, the minimum effect in the range where the above-mentioned effect can be obtained is executed. May be.

Further, in the "abnormality notification" in the "game standby" state, when the touch detection is changed from "absent" to "present" for the first time, the touch effect is controlled so as not to be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, When it is determined that the touch detection is changed from “absence” to “presence” for about 10 times or more), the “image” and the “voice” are then repeated every predetermined number of times (for example, every two times thereafter). By using the “lamp”, it is possible to understand that the touch detection is normally performed, and it is controlled to execute the touch effect indicating that the notification is normal according to the specification. On the other hand, during the "abnormality notification" under a specific condition such as after the production button is operated, when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present", regardless of the situation of "number of changes, etc." Without (regardless of whether it is the first time or the second time and thereafter), the touch effect is controlled not to be performed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No”, whether it is under a specific condition, such as after the operation of the effect button, regardless of the situation of “Number of changes, etc.” Regardless of whether or not it is controlled, the touch effect is not executed.

In this way, during the "abnormality notification" in the "game standby" state, even if the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present", the touch effect is not executed unless the operation is performed multiple times. Is configured. And, in a state where an abnormality has occurred, which is usually meaningless when the player does not operate the steering wheel or is unavoidably continuing to play the game, it may be meaningless or the discomfort may increase. There is no execution of a certain production. By doing so, it is possible to reduce discomfort to the player at the time of abnormality. Even in this state, a minute (suppressed) effect of notifying that the steering wheel touch was made when confirming the abnormal state, and an effect/complex notification trigger for confirming the abnormal state are set. If so, an effect such as notifying the information, that is, a minimum (minimum) effect in a range in which the above-described effect can be obtained may be executed. In addition, it is also preferable to execute a special touch effect that apologizes for the occurrence of the abnormality at the time of the touch effect execution trigger after the return screen after the abnormality notification.

In addition, in the case of an error abnormality (which can be referred to as a “non-recoverable error” or the like) that does not recover unless the power is turned on again for the aforementioned recoverable error, in the present embodiment, the game is In order to make it easier to understand that it is an abnormality that cannot be performed, control is performed so that the effect process itself including the touch effect is stopped (prohibited) as a whole, but when prioritizing simplification of the process In the case of a recoverable error, it is possible to execute the same processing as in the case of a recoverable error without prohibiting the touch effect.
<<<During pattern change>>>

Among the above-mentioned “state of gaming machine”, “during pattern change” includes “at the time of symbol stop”, “at the time of reach”, “during specific production”, and “abnormality display screen”. Of these, "at the time of symbol stop" indicates, for example, when the effect symbol (190) is in a stopped state immediately before the start of fluctuation, from the swing fluctuation (temporary stop) state immediately before the stop of fluctuation to the fixed stop. It should be noted that it seems that the situation is a low speed state that is not classified as a state in which the symbols are changing, or a part of the plurality of effect symbols is temporarily stopped, and only the remaining part is changing (low speed changing, etc.). It is also possible to include such situations in "at the time of design stop".

The above-mentioned "reach time" means a reach production time. As the "reach time", for example, a state in which a normal reach effect as illustrated in FIG. 37(a) is performed or an SP reach effect as illustrated in FIG. 37(b) is performed. The state can be mentioned, and the end of the reach effect can be the timing when the reach effect is finished and the decorative symbol corresponding to the fixed symbol (special symbol aspect scheduled to be stopped) is temporarily stopped.

The above-mentioned “during a specific effect” means a situation where a predetermined specific effect is being executed. Although not shown in the figure, the "specific production" is high in expectation of development to reach and relatively high in expectation of hit in a state where the reach production is not performed and the design is changing. In addition to the execution of productions that include notices indicating things, the execution of productions that give advance notice of the winning of a normal symbol, etc., also performed during the reach described above, and productions that promote the operation of production buttons and button operations Special effects that are performed in parallel with the reach effect, such as effects that are executed by, cut-in effects, black-out effects (effects that make the screen all black), etc. It is possible to exemplify the execution of a certain effect).

The above-mentioned “abnormality display screen” means that a predetermined image is displayed when a predetermined abnormality occurs. As the "abnormality display screen", although not shown, a message notifying the occurrence of an error such as running out of prize balls, full lower plate, opening of door, operation of movable accessory, etc. It is possible to exemplify a display of symbols and symbols.

Among these, in "at the time of symbol stop", when the touch detection is changed from "absent" to "present" for the first time, "image is stopped" on condition that there is no influence on other effects. And "voice" are controlled to be performed, while "lamp" is controlled not to be performed. Further, after the touch detection is changed from "absent" to "present" and the touch effect is executed, even if the touch detection is changed from "absent" to "present" again, the touch effect is not executed. Furthermore, at the time of "at the time of symbol stop" under a specific condition such as after the operation of the effect button is performed, control is performed so that none of the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp" is executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, control is performed so that the touch effect is not executed even if the change is the first time. In addition, under the same condition, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent” a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two times or more) or after the production button is operated during the game standby. In the same way as when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present", control is performed so that the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp" are not executed.

In this way, when the symbol is changing, "at the time of symbol stop", if the touch detection that occurs when the game is restarted is changed from "absent" to "present", the effect that is performed when the symbol is stopped is not hindered. It is configured so that a touch effect of a certain degree is executed. For example, when the design is stopped when the reach is off, a voice display such as "Please do your best!" A player's psychology when the game is restarted by executing the effect image that seems to be favorably received by the size or area that does not hinder the visibility of the display state of the symbol stop, or at such timing Can be expected to have the effect of improving In addition, there is also a player who repeatedly hits the operation unit regardless of whether or not the effect button is effective, in order to expect a change again when the symbol is stopped. Therefore, under specific conditions such as when the operation of the effect button is performed while the symbol is stopped or when vibration is detected to the extent that the game is not stopped, the touch effect is not executed. As a result, it can be expected to prevent unnecessary vibration from being given to the gaming machine when the symbol is stopped, and it is possible to prevent giving negative psychology to the player by performing unnecessary effects. In addition, when the symbol is stopped, a lamp display indicating the symbol stop is often performed. Therefore, by not performing touch effect overlapping with this display, the player can stop the symbol depending on the light emission mode of the lamp. It does not interfere with cognition.

In the above-mentioned "reach time", when the touch detection is changed from "absent" to "present" for the first time, none of the touch effects using "image", "voice", and "lamp" is executed. In addition, after the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present" for the first time, a change in the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times) or after the production button is operated. Even in the “reach time” under the conditions, no touch effect using the “image”, “voice”, and “lamp” is executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, the effects of “Image”, “Voice”, and “Lamp” are provided on condition that there is no effect on other effects that are performed during the reach. Is controlled so that both are performed. Furthermore, if the change in the touch state is detected again after the touch detection first changes from “Yes” to “No” (after the predetermined number of times), “Image”, “Voice”, and “Lamp” are selected. In the "reach time" under a specific condition such as after performing the operation of the effect button without performing any of the touch effects used, the "image" is provided on condition that there is no effect on other effects performed during the reach. , "Sound", and "lamp" are controlled to be executed.

In this way, in the "reach time", when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present", the touch effect is not executed. Generally, it is possible to perform an appropriate touch effect corresponding to a situation in which a player is firing (a situation in which touch detection is “present”). On the other hand, when a reach occurs, the result of the reach becomes the player's greatest interest, so it is possible that the player releases the handle. Therefore, when the operation is performed, an effect relating to the reliability is executed in response to the operation, or an effect indicating that it is not disadvantageous for the player to continue firing is performed. With this configuration, it is expected that a new gaming essence will be added to the handle operation (touch) at the time of reach. Of course, it is possible to expect the effect of improving the operation of the gaming machine by simply executing the production that prompts the player to continue firing, and it is configured to decide whether or not to execute the production by reflecting the reach result. By doing so, the playability can be further enhanced.

In the above-mentioned “during special performance”, when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” for the first time, the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” for the first time, as in the above-mentioned “At the time of reach”. Later, when a change in the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times), and in the case of "during specific performance" under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button, None of the touch effects using “image”, “voice”, and “lamp” are executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent” for the first time, similarly to the above-mentioned “at the time of reach”, there is no influence on other effects performed in “during specific effect”. The condition is controlled so that all of the effects of "image", "voice", and "lamp" are performed. Furthermore, if the change in the touch state is detected again after the touch detection first changes from “Yes” to “No” (after the predetermined number of times), “Image”, “Voice”, and “Lamp” are selected. Do not execute any of the touch effects used, and in the "specific effect" under specific conditions after the operation of the effect button etc., do not affect other effects performed in "during the specific effect". The condition is controlled to execute any of the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp".

In this way, in the same way as during "reach" during "specific production", when the touch detection changes from "absence" to "present", the touch production is configured not to be executed. During the "specific effect" during the change, it is generally possible to perform an appropriate touch effect corresponding to the situation where the player is firing (the situation where the touch detection is "present"). On the other hand, in "during a specific effect", the player may take his or her hand off the handle because the result of the symbol variation becomes the player's greatest interest. For this reason, when the operation is performed, it is disadvantageous to perform an effect related to the reliability in response to the operation (corresponding to a change in touch detection) or to keep the player firing. It is expected that a new game essence will be added to the handle operation (touch) at the time of the specific effect by configuring so as to perform the effect that does not occur. Of course, the effect of improving the operation of the gaming machine can be expected by simply executing the effect of prompting the player to continue firing, and the effect of the effect can be reflected to determine whether or not the effect can be executed. By configuring, it is possible to further enhance the playability.

Further, in the above-mentioned “abnormality display screen”, when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” for the first time, and when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes”, the touch detection is again made to “No”. When changing from "Available" to "Yes", control is performed to produce "voice" on the condition that there is no effect on other productions performed on the "abnormality display screen", while "image" and "lamp" are displayed. The effect of "" is controlled not to be executed. In addition, at the time of "at the time of symbol stop" under a specific condition such as after the operation of the effect button is performed, control is performed so that none of the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp" is executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, the “voice” effect is produced on condition that there is no effect on other effects performed at the “abnormality display screen”. On the other hand, the touch effect of "image" and "lamp" is controlled not to be executed. Furthermore, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent” and then the touch detection again changes from “present” to “absent” a predetermined number of times or more (for example, twice or more), and the operation of the effect button is performed. In the case of the "abnormality display screen" under a specific condition such as after the start, the touch effects of "image", "voice", and "lamp" are controlled not to be executed.

Thus, in the "abnormality display screen", when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present", it is not a situation in which the player is disadvantaged if the firing is stopped during the abnormality. At this time, it is possible to prevent the game from being inadvertently continued in the abnormal state by performing the touch effect informing that the steering wheel should not be operated because it is abnormal. Further, in the present embodiment, the priority of the abnormality notification and the touch effect is taken into consideration, and the touch effect is executed only by voice output. In addition, in a situation where the player is disadvantaged if the firing is stopped during the abnormal state, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No”, the fact that the firing is maintained is notified. By performing the touch effect by the "voice", when the stop of the firing is in a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, the effect prevents the game from being inadvertently stopped. be able to.
<<<<hitting>>>>

Among the above-mentioned “status of the gaming machine”, “at the time of hitting” can include “at the time of start demonstration”, “during round”, “between rounds”, “during specific performance”, and “at the time of end demonstration”. .. Of these, "at the time of start demonstration" means a situation in which a start demonstration of the big hit game is being executed, and "during round" is a unit game in which the big winning opening of the big winning opening device 90 is opened in the big winning game. It means that is the situation.

In addition, "between rounds" means that the situation is between "during a round" and the next "during a round", and "during a specific performance" is a specific one predetermined to "hit". It means the situation where the performance is being executed. Further, "at the time of end demo" means a situation where the end demo of the big hit game is being executed.

Of these, in the “during start demo”, if the touch detection changes from “no” to “present” for the first time, there is no effect on other performances performed during the “start demo”. While the control is performed so that the effect of "" is performed, the effect of "image" and "lamp" is controlled not to be executed. In addition, when the touch detection changes from "No" to "Yes", and then the touch detection changes from "No" to "Yes" again, and "Start" under specific conditions such as after the production button is operated. In the case of “demo”, control is performed so that none of the effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” is executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection is changed from "Yes" to "No" for the first time, and when the touch detection is changed from "Yes" to "No", the touch detection is again set from "Yes" to "No". When the number of changes is equal to or greater than the number of times (eg, twice or more), control is performed so that none of the touch effects of “image”, “voice”, and “lamp” is executed. Furthermore, in the case of "at the time of start demo" under a specific condition such as after the operation of the effect button, the touch effect of "image" is not executed, and the touch effect of "voice" or "lamp" is performed under the predetermined condition. Control to do.

As described above, during the “during start demo”, when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes”, for example, according to the variation content that is the big hit, the number of symbol variations until the big hit, etc. , "Congratulations!" and other "voice" blessing the big hit, it is possible to execute the effect of associating the game process and the resumption of launch. Also, if the touch detection changes from "Yes" to "No" when the start timing of the big hit game accompanied by an entity like a round game is approaching, such as the end of the "start demonstration", "fire" It is configured so that touch production by "voice" or "lamp" that suggests that it will soon switch to "unfavorable game state" or suggests the launch position such as "Please hit right!" By doing so, when the hand is released from the firing handle at an inappropriate timing, it is possible to notify that the firing operation is to be executed as a touch effect, if necessary.

In the above-mentioned “during a round”, when the touch detection is changed from “absent” to “present” for the first time, none of the touch effects using “image”, “voice”, and “lamp” is executed. In addition, after the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present" for the first time, a change in the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times) or after the production button is operated. Even under the “round” condition, no touch effect using “image”, “voice”, or “lamp” is executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, and when the touch state change is detected again after the touch detection first changes from “Yes” to “No”. In the case (after the predetermined number of times), none of the touch effects using “image”, “voice”, and “lamp” is executed. In addition, during "round" under a specific condition such as after the operation of the effect button, "image" "sound" "lamp" is provided on condition that there is no effect on other effects performed during "round". The control is performed so as to perform all of the effects.

In this way, the "during round" is only when the touch detection is changed from "present" to "absent" under a specific condition, for example, immediately after the start of the round, etc. Inappropriate by configuring so that touch production by "voice" or "lamp" that suggests that it is "state" or suggests the launch position such as "Please hit right!" When the hand is released from the firing handle at a timing, it is possible to notify that the firing operation is to be executed as a touch effect as needed.

In the above-mentioned “between rounds”, like the above-mentioned “during start demonstration”, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” for the first time, it affects other performances performed in “between rounds”. On the condition that there is no effect, the control is performed so that the "voice" effect is performed, while the "image" and "lamp" effects are not controlled. In addition, when the touch detection changes from "No" to "Yes", and then the touch detection changes from "No" to "Yes" again, and after the production button is operated, "Round In the case of “interval”, control is performed so that none of the effects of “image”, “voice”, and “lamp” is executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection is changed from "Yes" to "No" for the first time, and when the touch detection is changed from "Yes" to "No", the touch detection is again set from "Yes" to "No". When the number of changes is equal to or greater than the number of times (for example, twice or more), the touch effects of “image”, “voice”, and “lamp” are controlled so as not to be executed, as in the above-mentioned “during demonstration”. Furthermore, in the case of “between rounds” under a specific condition such as after the operation of the effect button, the touch effect of “image” is not executed but the touch effect of “voice” or “lamp” is controlled. To do.

In this way, during the “between rounds”, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing immediately before the start of the next round), the touch effect by “voice” is executed. For example, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” at the timing, a blessing effect such as “nice!” is executed by “voice”. On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” at a specific timing in a specific “between rounds” (for example, a round in which the time until the start of the next round is longer than usual), “voice” is output. The touch effect is performed by the "lamp". For example, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" at an early timing when a round is long, "nice!" is given by "voice". The production of the blessing like is executed. In this way, by providing effects related to the game (according to the skill) in accordance with the situation such as the period between rounds and the change state of touch detection, it is possible to provide an opportunity to improve the skill of the player. You can

In the above-mentioned "during special effect", when touch detection is changed from "absent" to "present" for the first time, as in "between rounds" described above, other touches are performed during "specific effect". On the condition that there is no influence, the control is performed so that the "voice" effect is produced, while the "image" and "lamp" effects are not performed. In addition, when the touch detection changes from "No" to "Yes", and then the touch detection changes from "No" to "Yes" again, and "Specification" under certain conditions such as after the production button is operated. In the case of "during production", control is performed so that none of the "image", "sound", and "lamp" productions are executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, and when the touch state change is detected again after the touch detection first changes from “Yes” to “No”. In the case of the predetermined number of times and thereafter, as in the case of “during round”, no touch effect using “image”, “voice”, and “lamp” is executed. Furthermore, that "during the specified effect" under certain conditions such as after the operation of the effect button does not affect other effects performed during the "during the specified effect" (for example, touch detection during the specified effect period). It is controlled to perform all the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp" under the condition of being within the acceptance period) or winning the effect execution lottery.

In this way, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” at a predetermined timing of “during specific effect” (for example, timing after result notification in promotion effect or condominium notification effect) The touch effect is configured to be executed. For example, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” at the timing, “lucky!” or “sorry!” depending on the notification result by “voice”. An effect such as is executed. On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” at a predetermined timing of “during specific effect” (for example, a timing of waiting for input in promotion effect or condominium notification effect), the “effect button” is pressed. Considered as an operation, it is configured to notify the result of the specific effect by “effect”, “voice”, and “lamp”. For example, during the promotion display, the instruction “Press the button!” is displayed. When the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", an effect corresponding to the result of the particular effect is executed. In this way, by changing the touch operation during the specific effect in the winning game, by executing the touch effect according to the result of the specific effect, or by using the execution trigger of the effect as an alternative to other input during the specific effect. Can be used for

In the above-mentioned "during demonstration", similar to the above-mentioned "during special effect", when the touch detection is changed from "absent" to "present" for the first time, other effects performed in "during demonstration" While the effect of "sound" is controlled on condition that there is no influence on, the effect of "image" and "lamp" is controlled not to be executed. In addition, when the touch detection changes from "No" to "Yes" and then the touch detection changes from "No" to "Yes" again, and "End" under specific conditions such as after the production button is operated. In the case of “demo”, control is performed so that none of the effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” is executed.

On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, and when the touch state change is detected again after the touch detection first changes from “Yes” to “No”. In the case of the predetermined number of times and thereafter, as in the case of “during round”, no touch effect using “image”, “voice”, and “lamp” is executed. Furthermore, at the time of "end demo" under a specific condition such as after the operation of the production button, "image" "sound" " Control is performed so that all the effects of "lamp" are performed.

In this way, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” at a predetermined timing of “during the end demo” (for example, timing immediately before the end of the end demo), the touch effect by “voice” is executed. For example, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” at the timing, an effect such as “do your best!” is executed according to the notification result by “voice”. It On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent” at a predetermined timing of “during demonstration” (for example, a timing immediately after the start of the ending demo), “effect”, “voice”, and “lamp” The touch effect is configured to be executed. For example, when the touch detection changes from "Yes" to "No" at the timing, a big hit of this time like "I got a lot of balls again this time!" Effect related to "image""sound""lamp" is executed. In this way, by executing the touch effect according to the timing during the end demonstration, the winning game and the change in the touch operation during the end demonstration can be appropriately linked.
<<<< During Probability Change (Electric Support)>>>>

Examples of the “probably changing (electric power support)” in the “state of the gaming machine” include “at the time of symbol stop”, “at the time of reach”, “during specific performance”, and “abnormality display screen”. These situations can have the same meanings as the situations assumed in the above-described “during pattern change” state. Then, in the example of FIG. 24B, when the touch detection is changed from “absent” to “present” and when the “presence” is changed to “absent”, the “change count etc.” is “first time”. , "Predetermined number of times" and "specific conditions", the effects of "image", "sound", and "lamp" are shown in FIG. It is defined (with the same content) as the production.

In order not to complicate the explanation, the state of the gaming machine is set in the same way as the above-mentioned “during pattern change” related to normal time (during non-electric power support), even for “during change (electric support)”. However, as a difference between the symbol variation during "probability change (electric support)" (omitted in Fig. 24) and "during symbol variation" during normal time, from the state of "symbol stop" to "game standby" It can be mentioned that the state does not shift to the “medium” state. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to set a game state different from "during symbol change" in the normal time, depending on factors such as the contents of the effect to be performed and the difference in control mode.

<<<Type of production>>
As described above, the execution state of the effect by the “image”, “voice”, and “lamp” is explained according to the state of the gaming machine, the touch detection change method, the number of changes, etc. Although the concept of "execution of performance" is common, various aspects such as those explained so far and those not explained can be adopted in terms of "what kind of production is executed". It is possible. Therefore, in the following, the effect type suitable as the effect executed in the above-described situation will be described in more detail with some examples.

25 and 26 are a list of more specific types of effects when a change in the touch state is detected in various game states.

FIG. 25 shows, from the left side of the diagram, "type of effect to be executed when detection state changes", "setting change relationship", "waiting for game", and "during symbol change". In addition, FIG. 26 shows “type of effect executed when the detection state changes”, “hit”, and “probably changing (electric power support)” from the left side of the chart. In FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, “setting change relation”, “game waiting”, “design changing”, “winning”, “probably changing (electric support)” indicate the state of the gaming machine, and are described above. It means the same as the classification shown as "state of gaming machine" in FIGS. 24(a) and 24(b).

Among the items shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the “type of effect executed when the detection state changes” is changed from “absent” to “present” when the touch detection is changed to “absent” to “absent”. This is a list of the types of effects that can be performed in the case of. Then, as shown in FIG. 25, as types of effects belonging to “types of effects executed when the detection state changes”, “shift to another mode (effect)”, “effects related to character”, and “game” "Promotion", "Retaining the end of the game", "RTC-related production", "Entrance prevention related production", "Card forgetting prevention related production", "Game explanation production", "Game result" “Notification effect regarding” and “touch notification”.

These types of effects are comprehensively classified and exemplified based on various functions and attributes. Then, the type of effect is not limited to the categories listed here, and other categories can be adopted. Also, types other than the types listed here can be provided. Furthermore, each type is not necessarily considered as being clearly separated, and it is also conceivable that, for example, a certain performance can be classified into a plurality of types in an overlapping manner.

Among the various types described above, the “shift to another mode (effect)” can also be referred to as, for example, “effect in another mode”. Then, in the "shift to another mode (production)", when the touch detection state changes from "absence" to "existence" (or "existence" to "absence"), the production mode changes to a different production mode. It means something. Further, the "production mode" is, for example, a (production) format/form that depends on determining the production display content such as a notice production or a reach production, and these production formats (production forms) are controlled in terms of control. It can be said that it is specified by the difference in the data code. Then, examples of the types of effect modes include stages A to Z in normal times and stages a to g in probability change (electric power support).

The above-mentioned "effect related to the character" is such that when the touch detection state changes from "absent" to "present" (or "present" to "absent"), the effect using the character is started or the character is used. It means something that changes the contents of the directed production. In addition, the above-mentioned "production that promotes the game" is such that the story in the production is advanced, the content of the production is developed, or the button production is executed according to the change in the state of the touch detection. I mean. Here, as described above, it is possible to classify the effects using the character into both "effects related to the character" and "effects for promoting the game".

In addition, as a specific example of the “effect related to the character”, there can be mentioned one in which an element of the effect related to the effect motif appears or changes based on the touch detection. More specifically, for example, "Martians" and "meteorites" and "spaceships" when game machines use space as a motif, and "batteries" and "doctors" when robots use motifs. Alternatively, a "weapon" or "armor" or the like in battle production may appear in the story based on touch detection, or existing production elements may be changed to these elements.

The above-mentioned "reproduction of holding the end of the game" means something that can be expected to work to discourage the player from ending the game and trying to leave the game machine, based on the state change of touch detection. doing. For example, the effect (limited frequency pattern effect) executed by using the above-described limited frequency pattern table can be considered to be included in this “effect for holding the end of the game”. Furthermore, an effect that develops the middle of a series of stories, etc., can be considered as being included in this "effect that holds the end of the game."

As this "retaining the end of the game", display a message for the purpose of retaining such as "please have a little more!", "Don't stop ~!" And other effects can be illustrated. In addition, when using the limited frequency pattern table as described above, a predetermined limited frequency pattern table is selected with the touch detection as a trigger, and a unique and rare effect is caused to appear at a high frequency in the subsequent several games. Alternatively, it is possible to make it easier for an effect that normally appears less frequently to appear.

The above-mentioned "RTC-related effect" means something that is performed based on real time using an RTC (real time clock). For example, an effect such as the above-mentioned “E121:RTC” can be considered to correspond to this “RTC-related effect”. In addition, an effect that is performed using the RTC, for example, an effect that is performed by deciding a due date or a season, an effect that is performed by deciding a time zone of the day, an effect that is simultaneously performed by a plurality of pachinko game machines, and the like. This can be exemplified as "RTC-related effect".

The above-mentioned "entry-in prevention related effect" means something that prevents the player from excessively concentrating on the game. For example, it is possible to think of one that produces an "image" or "sound" accompanied by a message such as "Pachinko is a moderately enjoyable game" or "Be careful not to get caught".

The above-mentioned "effect of forgetting to remove a card" means that the player does not forget to take out various cards from the card unit. For example, it is possible to think of one that produces an "image" or "voice" accompanied by a message such as "Be careful not to forget to take the card" or "Please remember to take the card".

The above-mentioned “playing of game explanations and the like” means for explaining the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 10 and explaining environmental settings such as volume. For example, it is possible to consider a type of big hit and a degree of expectation (big hit probability), a type of effect mode, an introduction of a character that appears, a display of an environment setting menu, and the like, which are displayed as an effect of “image”.

The above-mentioned “notification effect regarding game result” means notification effect of the game result such as determination of winning/decreasing and jackpot type. For example, it is possible to exemplify the notification effect of the result related to the change (the change) at that time. Then, in this case, as will be described later, it is conceivable that the "notifying effect regarding game result" is not performed in "during game standby" in FIG. In addition, as the "notification effect regarding the game result", the transition of the payout and the number of big hits of the pachinko game machine 10 on that day, the number of big hits during the probability change and the electric power support, the number of acquired balls, etc. It is also possible to display.

The above-mentioned “touch notification” means to notify that there is a touch operation. Here, the term "touch notification" can be broadly considered to include the types of effects described above, such as a predetermined effect being started when a touch is detected and the effect being changed. However, the “touch notification” shown in FIG. 25 means to notify that there is a touch operation (touch detection). As the “touch notification”, for example, “touch notification” together with the image of the steering wheel is displayed. It is possible to exemplify a case where a character display such as “there was a touch operation, or a voice display” is performed, or a predetermined lamp (LED) is turned on.

Then, examples of effects other than "touch notification" include effects that are executed regardless of presence/absence of touch detection. Then, as effects other than "touch notification", for example, a notice during pattern change, an effect during a big hit, an effect used during a demonstration, and the like can be given.

In the example of FIG. 25, types of “dedicated” and “shared” are provided for each type from “effect related to character” to “touch notification” described above. Among these, “dedicated” is provided as a dedicated one for each of “effect related to character” to “touch notification”, and as an effect other than “effect related to character” to “touch notification” based on touch detection. Means production not used. Further, “shared” means an effect used as an effect other than “touch related” from “effect related to character” based on touch detection.
<<<Setting change relationship>>>

Of the various game machine states shown in FIG. 25, the “setting change relationship” described above is set to the “setting change” and “setting display” states as in the example of FIG. 24(a). There is. Here, the situation represented by “setting change in progress” and “setting display in progress” is similar to that in the example of FIG. In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the symbols “◯”, “Δ”, and “x” are used, and the meanings of these symbols are the same as in the example of FIG. 24A. "Is preferable to execute", "Δ" is "suitable or possible to execute under a certain condition", and "x" means "execute is unfavorable or difficult".

Of these, “Δ” indicates that the effectiveness is conditionally shown, but it is possible to adopt a control mode in which any of the effects is executed. Furthermore, although the "x" is unfavorable or difficult to execute, it is also possible to adopt a control mode in which it is intentionally executed. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the symbol “−” is used, and the symbol “−” here indicates that it is not the object of the allocation of the performance.

Then, in the state of “setting change relationship” shown in FIG. 25, “setting is being changed” or “setting is being displayed”, and thus the touch detection shown at the left end of the figure is changed from “absent” to “present”. In this case, the “shift to another mode (effect)” is not executed (x). Further, the "character-related effect" to the "game result notification effect" are the above-mentioned "-" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

The above-mentioned "dedicated" effect related to "touch notification" is suitable or possible to execute under certain conditions in both "setting change" and "setting display" (△), The effect of "shared" is unfavorable or difficult (X) to be executed in both cases of "setting change" and "setting display".

Regarding the state of this “setting change relationship”, even when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, the above-mentioned touch detection is “absent” from “effect related to character” to “touch notification”. Similar to the case of “present”, an agreement regarding the type of effect is made.

Further, as indicated by “Δ” in the “setting change relationship” in the “game machine state” of FIG. 24A, only the effect by the “lamp” can be executed in the “setting change relationship” state. There is a nature. In FIG. 25, “Δ” indicates that the “touch notification” effect executed in the “setting change relationship” state is a special effect for notifying the touch detection using the lamp. .. On the other hand, since it is an effect using a lamp, various effects such as “effects related to the character”, “effects for promoting the game”, and “effects for holding the end of the game” cannot be executed. "-" which is not the target of the regulation here is shown.

Then, in accordance with these agreements, regarding the item of “△” (here, the effect of “dedicated” “touch notification”), the display in the state of “setting change” or “setting display” does not get in the way. It is possible to execute the effect in a suppressed manner. The item “x” (here, “shared” “touch notification”) is not executed. Here, as the effect of the “dedicated” “touch notification”, it is possible to exemplify that character display of “setting change” or “setting display” is performed at the bottom of the screen.
<<<< game waiting >>>

Next, examples of the above-mentioned "game standby" state include "demo screen", "adjustment screen", "fluctuation standby screen", "initialization notification", and "abnormality notification". These states are similar to those described in the example of FIG. In the "demo screen" (during display) of "waiting for game", it is preferable to execute "shift to another mode (production)" when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present". It is said to be good (○). Furthermore, it is preferable to execute the "effect related to the character" and the "effect for promoting the game" for both "dedicated" and "shared" (○).

Also, in the case where the touch detection is changed from "absence" to "present", the "reproduction of holding the end of the game" is not preferable or difficult to execute for both "dedicated" and "shared" (×) It is said that. Furthermore, "RTC-related effects" and "intrusion prevention-related effects" are preferably executed (○) for both "dedicated" and "shared". The “effect” is set to be suitable or possible (Δ) to be executed under certain conditions for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

Among these, the reason why the "effect of forgetting to remove the card" is "△" is based on the following idea. That is, it is desirable that the "card removal forgetting prevention-related effect" be performed when there is a high possibility of leaving the seat, such as at the end of a game, so when touch detection changes from "absent" to "present" It is considered that the effect of production is small. On the other hand, for example, under certain conditions, such as when the touch effect is permitted to be executed after the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, but a certain period of time has not elapsed (when leaving the seat for a short time) As long as you start playing the game, performing related productions such as "Don't you forget to pick up the card?" is considered to have a certain effect. May be. Therefore, the "effect of forgetting to remove the card" is preferable or possible to be executed under a certain condition (Δ).

In addition, "playing of game explanations and the like" is "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "notification of game result notification" is "dedicated" because no corresponding notification is given. , “Shared”, no agreement has been made and it is said to be “−”. Furthermore, "touch notification" is "O" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

Further, in the “demo screen”, when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, “shift to another mode (production)” is “x”. In addition, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No”, as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), the corresponding notification is not made, so arrangements for both “dedicated” and “shared” are made. "-" that is not the target of.

Then, in the "adjustment screen" (while it is displayed) in "waiting for game", when the touch detection is changed from "absent" to "present", "switch to other mode (production)" is changed to "game". "Promotion to promote" is described as "△". In addition, the "reproduction of holding the end of the game" is "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "RTC related production" is "dedicated" and "shared". △”.

Here, the reason why the “RTC-related effect” is set to “Δ”, which means that there is a condition, and the “touch notification” is set to “◯”, which means that execution is preferable, is as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 24( a ), for the “adjustment screen” of “waiting for game”, the effect of “image” is not executed, but the effect of “voice” (conditional “ramp” effect is displayed. Combined use). In this way, with regard to the “adjustment screen” of “waiting for game”, since the effects are limited to “lamp” and “voice” other than “image”, “touch notification” is given priority and “RTC-related” is given. The priority of "drafting" is set lower than that of "touch notification".

In addition, "depression related relationship production" to "production of game explanation etc." is "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "notification production regarding game result" is applicable. Since no notification is given, "-" is given for both "dedicated" and "shared". Furthermore, "touch notification" is "O" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

Further, as for the “adjustment screen”, when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, “shift to another mode (effect)” is “x”. Furthermore, as for the other "effects related to the character" to "touch notification", the corresponding notification is not performed as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary). −”. In this way, in the "adjustment screen" of "waiting for a game", only when the touch detection is changed from "absent" to "present", there is a touch notification to the extent that adjustment work is not affected, and a game is promoted. The effect related to is to be executed in a limited manner.

Subsequently, in the case where the touch detection is changed from "absent" to "present" in the "variation standby screen" (during display) of "waiting for game", "shift to another mode (production)" is "x". It is said that. Further, "character-related effect" and "game promotion effect" are both "dedicated" and "shared" as "○", and "game end effect" is "dedicated" , "Shared" are both marked with "x".

In addition, "RTC-related effect" and "depression prevention related effect" are both "O" for "dedicated" and "shared", and "card removal forgetting prevention related effect" is " Both “dedicated” and “shared” are marked with “Δ”. In addition, the "reproduction of game explanations" is "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "notification of game result" is that the game result is not derived. Both "dedicated" and "shared" are marked as "-". In addition, “touch notification” is “O” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

Of these, the "card removal forgetting relations" is said to be suitable or possible to execute under certain conditions (△) is the "card removal forgetting relations" related to the "demo screen" described above. This is because it is similar to the case of “”, and the situation in which the effect of producing the effect is considered to be large is limited to the case of leaving the seat for a short time.

Next, regarding the “Variation standby screen” of “Variation standby”, when the touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No”, “Transition to other mode (production)” is set to “△”. There is. Furthermore, the “production related to the character” to the “production for holding the end of game” is “◯” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

Here, in the case where the touch detection is changed from "present" to "absent", "shift to another mode (production)" is set to "△", for example, when the player waits for fluctuation and is shot by the player. When the player tries to leave the seat by releasing the handle (20), it is not expected that the player's interest in the game will be enhanced even if the player shifts to another effect mode, but the player is requested to return to the pachinko game machine 10 again. This is because it may be possible to give the intention to return to the seat. In addition, it is possible to perform control such as returning to the default effect mode (for example, the initial setting mode when the power is turned on, or the effect mode when the player is not selected according to the environment setting) with leaving the seat. Is.

In addition, "RTC-related production" is marked as "△" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "depression-related production" for both "dedicated" and "shared" It is said to be "x". In addition, "card removal forgetting prevention-related production" is "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "reproduction of game explanation etc." is either "dedicated" or "shared". Is also marked as "x".

Here, "RTC-related effect" is "△" in "dedicated" and "common", and the reason why the touch effect is different depending on what kind of effect is adopted as the RTC extension. This is because it is considered that there are cases.

Further, as for the “notification effect regarding game result”, since the corresponding notification is not performed on the “variation standby screen” as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), “dedicated” or “shared” is applied. “-” is given, and “touch notification” is given as “◯” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

Next, in the “initialization notification” (middle) in “waiting for game”, when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes”, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” In either case, “shift to another mode (effect)” is “x”. Further, as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), the touch effect is not performed. This is because there is a high possibility that no player is present during the initialization notification immediately after the power is turned on, and it is meaningless to execute the effect due to the change in touch detection.

Subsequently, in the “abnormality notification” (while being displayed) in the “game standby”, when the touch detection is changed from “absent” to “present”, “shift to another mode (effect)” is “×”. It is said that. Furthermore, the "effects related to the character" to the "effects such as game explanation" are "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared". On the other hand, “notification effect regarding game result” and “touch notification” are set to “Δ” to be executed under a specific condition for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

Furthermore, in the "abnormality notification" (during display), when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", "shift to another mode (effect)" is "x". Further, as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), the touch effect is not performed. In this way, in the "abnormality notification" (during display) in the "game standby", the touch notification is shown to the extent that the adjustment work is not affected only when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present". The effect and the information effect regarding the game result are limitedly executed.
<<<During pattern change>>>

Next, examples of the above-mentioned "symbol changing" state include "at the time of symbol stop", "at the time of reach", "during specific production", and "abnormality display screen". These states are similar to those described in the example of FIG. In the “at the time of symbol stop” in this “during pattern change”, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”, “shift to another mode (effect)” is “x”. Furthermore, the “effect related to the character” is “Δ” for “dedicated” and “x” for “shared”.

In this way, regarding "effects related to the character", the effect of "common" is "x", it is distinguished whether the effect is shared by touch detection when the effect is shared when the symbol is stopped, or whether it is an effect related to symbol variation. This is because it is not possible to do so, and the effect of the touch effect fades. Such a situation also applies to "at the time of reach", "during specific effect", and "abnormality display screen" described below. For this reason, in many cases (for example, while the winning symbol is changing), it is desirable to adopt a control mode in which the "character-related effect" in the "changing symbol" is executed only under special conditions. it is conceivable that.

In addition, the "promotion to promote the game" is "△" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "reproduction of holding the end of the game" to the "reproduction effect related to forgetting to take a card" is " Both “dedicated” and “shared” are marked as “x”. Further, in the “production of game explanation etc.”, “dedicated” is “Δ” and “shared” is “x”. In addition, "notification effect regarding game result" is "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "touch notification" is "△" for both "dedicated" and "shared". It is said that.

More specifically, if the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”, it is considered that the player has the intention to start (restart) the game in principle, so that the game should be continued. While the effect that prompts is preferable, "the effect of holding the end of the game", "the effect of preventing forgetting to remove the card", etc. related to ending the game is not suitable as the effect in the state of "at the time of symbol stop". Can be said. For this reason, as described above, the "promotion to promote the game" is set to "△" for both "dedicated" and "common", and the "production for keeping the end of the game" to the "reproduction for preventing forgetting card" is Both “dedicated” and “shared” are marked with “x”.

Then, as the "production that promotes the game", display a character or an item to inspire the expectation that the story in the production will proceed, or display the character "development?" Can be illustrated.

Subsequently, in the “at the time of symbol stop” in “during pattern change”, when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, “shift to another mode (production)” is set to “x”. There is. Furthermore, the “effect related to the character” is “Δ” for “dedicated” and “x” for “shared”.

In addition, the "promotion to promote the game" is "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and the "production to hold the end of the game" is "dedicated" and "shared". It is said to be "○". Furthermore, "RTC-related production" is marked as "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "production for preventing intrusion" is "dedicated" , “Shared” are both marked with “Δ”.

In addition, "notification effect regarding game result" is "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "touch notification" is "△" for both "dedicated" and "shared". It is said that.
In this way, when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present" at "at the time of symbol stop" in "during pattern change", the production and game showing touch notification under certain conditions are promoted. On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, the main effect is to hold the end of the game. It can be said that this can be expected to have an influence on the player with the stop of symbols as the criterion for ending the game.

In addition, in the “reach time” of “during pattern change” and “during specific production”, when “touch detection” changes from “absence” to “present”, “shift to another mode (production)” is “ X”. Further, in the "notifying effect regarding game result", "shared" is "△", and other effects are "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

Furthermore, when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, “shift to another mode (production)” is set to “x”. Further, the "character-related effect" is "△" for "dedicated" and "x" for "shared". In addition, the “production for promoting the game” to the “production for explaining the game” is “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

Further, the "notification effect regarding game result" is "△" for "dedicated" and "x" for "shared". The “touch notification” is “x” for “dedicated” and “Δ” for “shared”.

In this way, in the “reach time” and “during special production” in “during pattern change”, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” or “present” to “absent”, certain conditions are satisfied. Based on this, it is possible to execute the notification effect related to the game result dedicated to the touch effect, and due to the change in the touch detection, in addition to the effect during the symbol change, the notification effect regarding the game result that is difficult to be confused with the effect when the symbol changes can do.

Furthermore, in the "abnormality display screen" (during display) in "During pattern change", when the touch detection changes from "No" to "Yes", when the touch detection changes from "Yes" to "No" In any of the above, “shift to another mode (production)” is set to “x”. Further, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”, the touch notification “dedicated” and “shared” effects may be executed under certain conditions, but as described above (if necessary, For other effects, corresponding notifications are not given, so that “dedicated” and “shared” are both “-”.

In this way, in the "abnormality display screen" (during display) in "during pattern change", when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present", only a touch notification is issued under certain conditions. Can be executed, but other effects are not executed. Thus, it can be said that it is possible to prevent the interest from being diminished without inadvertently performing a game promotion or the like when an abnormality occurs.
<<<<hitting>>>>

Next, examples of the above-mentioned "hit" state include "during start demo", "during round", "between rounds", "during specific performance", and "during end demonstration". These states are the same as those described in the example of FIG. When the touch detection changes from "No" to "Yes", or when the touch detection changes from "Yes" to "No" in "At the time of the start demo" (when the start demo is displayed) In any of the above cases, “shift to another mode (production)” is “x”. Furthermore, "character-related effect" and "game-promoting effect" are both "O" for "dedicated" and "shared".

In addition, "reproduction to hold the end of game" is "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "RTC-related production" is "dedicated" and "shared". △”. In addition, "depression prevention related production" is "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "card removal prevention related production" is "dedicated" and "shared". Both are marked with "△".

Furthermore, "playing of game explanations and the like" and "notification of game result" are both "exclusive" and "shared", and "touch notification" is "exclusive" and "shared". Any of the "" is marked as "△".

In this way, at the "starting demo" in "winning" (while the starting demo is being displayed), it is not confused with the effect when the design changes, so whether the game is shared or dedicated, the game is promoted, By executing the production related to the character, it is possible to expect an effect of enormously increasing the blissful time for the player, which is a big hit. In addition, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being drowned by executing an effect that holds the end of the game in relation to the end of the game that the player may not select. It can be said that it is possible.

In addition, in the “in round” of the “hit”, in each of the cases where the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” and the touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No”, "Transition to mode (production)" is set to "x". In addition, the “effects related to the character” to the “effects such as game explanation” are “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. On the other hand, “notification effect regarding game result” and “touch notification” are set to “Δ” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

In this way, during the “round” of the “hit”, the firing is continuously performed (the state of the touch detection being “present” is maintained). Therefore, the minimum necessary touch detection notification or during the round is performed. In the notification effect screen, it is possible to execute effects limited to alternative functions such as when the hand that does not hold the handle cannot be used, and the range that does not hinder the firing that is performed during the hit, which is the essence of the game It can be said that it has achieved the appropriate effect setting at the time of touching.

Further, in the “between rounds” in the “hit”, when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” and when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No”, each performance type Each of the execution modes of (1) is defined (with the same content) as in the above-mentioned “during round”.

In addition, as “during specific performance” in “hit”, “touch” changes from “no” to “yes”, and touch detection changes from “yes” to “no” “Transition to other mode (effect)” is set to “x”. In addition, the “effects related to the character” to the “effects such as game explanation” are “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. Furthermore, "notification effect regarding game result" is "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "touch notification" is "△" for both "dedicated" and "shared". It is said that.

In this way, in the “specific production” in the “hit”, as in the “round”, the firing is continuously performed (the state in which the touch detection is “present” is maintained). , In the notification effect screen, it is possible to execute effects limited to alternative functions, such as when the hand that does not hold the handle cannot be used, and does not hinder the firing that is performed during the hit, which is the essence of the game. It can be said that it is possible to realize an appropriate effect setting at the time of touching only within the range.

Furthermore, in the “during end demo” (while the end demo is displayed) in “hit”, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”, “switch to another mode (effect)” is “ X”. In addition, from "character-related effects" to "RTC-related effects", "exclusive" and "common" are both marked as "x", and "depression prevention related effects" and "forgotten card removal" “Prevention-related production” is set to “Δ” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

Further, "playing of game explanations and the like" is marked as "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "reporting regarding game results" is available for both "dedicated" and "shared". It is said to be "○". In addition, “touch notification” is “Δ” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

Furthermore, when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, “shift to another mode (production)” is set to “x”. In addition, "character-related effects" to "RTC-related effects" are "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "entanglement prevention related effects" is "dedicated". , “Shared” are both marked with “Δ”.

In addition, "card removal forgetting prevention-related production" is "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "reproduction of game explanation etc." is either "dedicated" or "shared". Is also indicated as “△”. In addition, "notification effect regarding game result" is "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "touch notification" is "△" for both "dedicated" and "shared". It is said that.

In this way, in the "end demonstration" (while the end demo is displayed) in "hit", the touch detection is "absent" in consideration of the possibility of leaving the seat or stopping the game when the big hit ends. It can be said that it is preferable to execute a game result (for example, information about a game state after the end of a big hit) or an effect for preventing forgetting to take a card. In addition, when the game content after the big hit is complicated, when the touch detection becomes "no", it is possible to provide an opportunity to grasp the game content by displaying the explanation about the game content after that. It can be said that it is suitable.
<<<< During Probability Change (Electric Support)>>>>

Next, examples of the above-mentioned state of "probably changing (electric support)" include "at the time of symbol stop", "at the time of reach", "during specific effect", and "abnormality display screen". These states are the same as those described in the example of FIG. Then, when the touch detection is changed from "absent" to "present", and when the touch detection is changed from "present" to "absent", the execution modes of each effect type are all the "symbol variation" described above. It is defined in the same manner (with the same contents) as "medium" (FIG. 25).

Here, the following can be said about the specific game state such as during probability change or during electric support. For example, it is considered desirable not to shift to the demo state (here, the normal demo state in which the standby screen A is displayed) during the probability change or the power support. In this way, the transition to the game standby state (normal demo state) can be premised on the low probability and low base state (non-probable variation and non-electric power support state), and the touch effect, It is easy to specialize in production from the viewpoint of "playing". In other words, the touch effect can be produced by emphasizing the content indicating "starting the game" from the state of low probability and low base.

Further, it can be said that it is preferable not to execute the firing detection effect (touch effect) in the unchanging state during the probability change or during the electric power support (which can be said to be the standby state in the specific game state). However, volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are possible. In the example explained so far, the adjustment screen (FIG. 33C) is displayed by operating the effect buttons (the operation buttons 22 and the like) during the demo screen (in the normal demo state in which the standby screen A is displayed here). After that, the volume and brightness (light quantity) are adjusted in that state. Then, even in a situation in which the adjustment screen is not normally moved to, such as in a state other than the demo screen, it may be possible to move to the adjustment screen by operating the effect button in a predetermined state. .. As the "predetermined state" here, for example, a game state in which use of the effect button used for adjustment is not planned can be mentioned. More specifically, for example, a display of the standby screen B, a symbol change, or a big hit game can be illustrated. Further, the “predetermined state” may be a state in which it does not matter whether it is the positive change state or the electric support state during the change.

Further, the adjustment meter described above is also displayed on the adjustment screen (FIG. 33(c)) displayed under such conditions. In addition, the display priority (display priority) of the adjustment screen in the situation is from the decorative symbols (effect symbols 190a to 190c) and the reserved display region (the first reserved number display unit 196 and the second reserved number display unit 197). May be higher or lower. Further, in the adjustment screen displayed by satisfying the condition of the “predetermined state” described above, the display of the adjustment meter as described above is performed by, for example, the image object ( It is conceivable to use a simple image). This is because it is suitable when the other display is more necessary. It should be noted that the display of the above-mentioned simple image is performed in a normal adjustment screen such as displaying only the volume adjustment meter or the light amount adjustment meter relatively small on the screen or displaying it semitransparently. It is desirable that the visibility be lower than in the case.

Even on the adjustment screen displayed under such a condition, it is possible to adjust the volume, the amount of light, and the like by using the cross key (96). In order to display the adjustment screen (including the simple image), for example, in addition to the control mode of displaying the adjustment screen (simple image) by pressing the operation button (22) during the change, the operation button (22) during the change It is possible to employ a control mode in which the cross key (96) is directly operated without pressing. As a specific example, when the cross key (96) is operated during the change when the adjustment screen (simple image) is not displayed, the adjustment screen (simple image) is displayed and the cross key ( 96) is additionally operated to adjust the volume and the light amount. In addition, when the cross key (96) is operated during the change when the adjustment screen (simple image) is not displayed, the adjustment screen (simple image) is displayed and both the volume and the light amount are adjusted. (The display of the adjustment screen and the adjustment of the volume or the light amount are performed together by one cross key operation). Further, even if the touch detection and these operations are performed at the same time, the respective processes may be performed at the same time, and in that case, the touch effect is changed so as not to affect the recognition of the adjustment result by the player. And output it.
<Regulations after the second time>

FIGS. 27A and 27B are related to the “property of the effect” shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B. Then, FIGS. 27A and 27B relate to “after a predetermined number of times” of “the number of times of change” related to touch detection, and regarding the effect that can be executed for the first time, the “change state” is the second time. It shows whether or not the effect is restricted in the case after that.

Specifically, in FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b), as the "type of effect to be executed when the detection state changes", "setting change relationship", "waiting for game", "during pattern change", "hit" Regulations for the effects in each state of "medium" and "probably changing (electric power support)" are shown. Further, with respect to these states, the presence/absence of execution of “effect change function based on effect button operation” and “effect by touch detection, etc.” is specified. That is, regarding the second or subsequent detection state changes related to the effect buttons (the operation buttons 22 and the like) and the second and subsequent detection state changes related to touch detection on the firing handle 20, presence or absence of effect regulation in each state of the gaming machine. Is specified.

Further, in FIGS. 27A and 27B, “restricted” is indicated by a symbol “◯”, and “no restriction” is indicated by a symbol “X”. Further, the symbol “Δ” indicates that the situation is further subdivided (“depending on the case”).

For example, in the case where the state of the gaming machine is either “setting change” in “setting change relation” or “setting is being displayed”, “effect change function based on effect button operation” and “by touch detection” In this case, the effect regulation for "effects and the like" is "x".

Further, when the state of the gaming machine is "game waiting", "demo screen", "adjustment screen", "fluctuation standby screen", "initialization notification", "abnormality notification" as described above. Is provided. In this case, the effect regulation for the "effect change function based on effect button operation" is "x". In addition, and regarding "effects etc. by touch detection", "Demo screen" is "○", "Adjustment screen" is "△", "Variation standby screen" is "○", "Initialization notification" is "△". , "Abnormality notification" is "X".

Then, in the case where the state of the gaming machine is "during pattern change", "at the time of symbol stop", "at the time of reach", "during specific performance", "abnormality display screen" are provided in the same manner as described above. ing. In this case, the effect regulation for the "effect change function based on effect button operation" is "x". In addition, and for "effects etc. by touch detection", "at the time of symbol stop" is "△", "at the time of reach" is "○", "during specific effect" is "○", and "abnormality display screen" is "×". It has become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27B, in the case where the state of the gaming machine is "winning", "during start demo", "during round", "between rounds", "similar to those described above. “During special performance” and “During demonstration” are provided. In this case, the effect regulation for the "effect change function based on effect button operation" is "x". In addition, the production restrictions in this case regarding “production by touch detection, etc.” are both “◯”.

Furthermore, when the state of the gaming machine is "probably changing (electric power support)", "at the time of symbol stop", "at the time of reach", "during specific performance", and "abnormality display screen" are the same as those described above. It is provided. In this case, the effect regulation for the "effect change function based on effect button operation" is "x". In addition, the production restrictions in this case regarding “production by touch detection, etc.” are both “◯”.
<Specific example of effect output timing in each state of the gaming machine>
<<Example of performance output timing from setting change to subsequent state>>

Next, a specific example of the effect output in each state of the gaming machine will be described with reference to the above-mentioned “whether or not to produce” (FIGS. 24A and 24B). First, the timing chart of FIG. 28 shows an example of the effect output when the setting is changed. More specifically, FIG. 28 shows an example of the effect output in the period from the start of the setting change accompanying the power-on to the completion of the setting change and the standby state. Further, in the relationship with the game state shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, after “C3: setting change (probability change) state” of “C: special state”, “B11: in game standby state” “B11: It corresponds to the situation of shifting from "game standby A (normal demo display)" to "B12; game standby state B (stopping symbols)".

The "control state" shown at the top of FIG. 28 indicates the state of the gaming machine, and this "control state" becomes "initial setting in progress" in which the above-described initial setting process (FIG. 15) is performed when the power is turned on. The operation shifts to the “setting change mode” in which the above-mentioned setting change processing (FIG. 16) is performed by operating the setting key. Further, after the setting change is completed, the mode shifts to the "normal mode" and shifts to the standby state (game standby state) as described above. Under such a premise, the influence on the state-corresponding output when there is an effect button or touch detection, and the touch effect performed at that time are shown in the next and subsequent stages.

After the power is turned on and the initial settings are completed, if the setting key is inserted and the mode changes to the setting change mode, the "image display" corresponding to the setting change is displayed as shown in "Status corresponding output". , “Voice output”, “Lamp output” are performed. When the operation button 22 or the like is operated in this state, the state-corresponding output does not change, and the output of “image”, “voice”, and “lamp” corresponding to the setting change continues. On the other hand, if the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” during the setting change, there is no change in the state-corresponding output, but there is a change in the touch detection, as in the case where the effect button was operated. The lamp effect indicating is executed for a fixed time. Further, thereafter, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, the touch effect is not executed and the state-corresponding output does not change.

Here, as the output related to the “image display” during the setting change, for example, an output as shown in FIG. 36B can be exemplified. Specifically, the text display "Settings are being changed" and the message "Settings are being changed. After the setting is changed, the frame door is closed to shift to normal game." There is. Although illustration is omitted, as the output of “setting change” related to “audio output”, an example of performing audio output of “setting change” can be exemplified, and “setting change” related to “lamp display” As an output of "," an output that drives a plurality of predetermined LEDs in a pattern determined in advance as an output of "setting being changed" can be exemplified.

Next, when the setting change described above is completed and the setting change process ends, the control state shifts to the normal mode. At this time, as the state-corresponding output, for example, “standby screen A” as shown in FIG. 33A is output as “image display”. Further, as “voice output”, voice output indicating “change completed” such as “setting change completed” is performed. Furthermore, for "lamp display", "demo display" is performed with the drive pattern during the standby demonstration. Further, upon completion of the setting change, the touch effect prohibition timer relating to “J: Setting of permission timing” in FIG. 23 is cleared, and the restriction of the touch effect in the subsequent standby screen is released.

In this state, when the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”, the touch notification or the like corresponding to the state of the standby screen A will be executed. Specifically, a voice such as "Welcome. Enjoy your pachinko today!" is output in the voice of the character appearing on the gaming machine as an effect related to the character or an effect that promotes the game. A lamp display that is interlocked with voice is executed, or a character image is displayed in the display area (see FIG. 25 and FIG. 34A if necessary). Since the touch detection is set to change from “absent” to “present” as a trigger for changing the standby screen from A to B, the image display related to the notification is as shown in FIG. 34(b). In the state where the standby screen B is displayed, a character image or a character display such as "Welcome♪" is executed. After the performance prohibition timer is cleared, the performance prohibition timer is set at the timing when the touch detection changes from "No" to "Yes", and when the touch detection changes to "Yes" or "No". Although the time counting by the prohibition timer is started, a more specific processing mode of the effect output associated with such touch detection will be described later.

Next, when the standby screen A is displayed, the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present”, and after the touch notification effect based on this and the state change to the standby screen B are performed, the touch detection is performed again. When the touch detection is performed, the processing such as the effect based on the touch detection changes depending on the timing when the touch detection is performed. FIG. 28 exemplifies a case where the touch detection changes from “absent” to “present” when the standby screen A is displayed, and then the counted time of the effect timer does not become “0”. In this case, the touch effect is not executed. Further, the touch effect prohibition timer relating to the above-mentioned “J: setting of permission timing” is set to an initial value (for example, 60 seconds). Then, after that, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", the timing of the effect prohibition timer is started.

As described above, as described from the power-on to the normal mode (standby screen) through the setting change mode, the effect based on the touch detection is the gaming state of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is configured to set the presence/absence of execution and the content of execution according to the production permission restriction condition shown in FIG. Here, the production prohibition timer related to the production permission restriction condition will be described in detail.

The effect prohibition timer is a timer for determining whether or not execution of the effect based on the change is permitted when the “touch detection” is changed. Furthermore, the production prohibition timer functions as a time counting timer in "H1: processing of time counting timer (addition, subtraction, clear, etc.)" and an internal timer in "J: setting of permission timing" shown in FIG. Is. For example, in the example of FIG. 28, the effect prohibition timer is cleared when the setting change is completed. Then, regardless of how long the effect prohibition timer has been, processing for allowing execution of the touch effect is performed.

Next, if touch detection is performed while the "standby screen A" is displayed as shown in the "image display" of the "state-corresponding output", the touch effect is not allowed for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) thereafter. Then, the process of setting "60 seconds" in the effect prohibition timer is performed. Then, when the CPU 521 is notified that the finger is separated from the firing handle (20) and the touch detection is changed (here, it is changed from ON to OFF), the process of starting the subtraction of the effect inhibition timer is performed.

After the start of the subtraction described above (during the subtraction of the effect prohibition timer), if touch detection is performed again before the effect prohibition timer becomes “0”, the effect prohibition timer waits again (for example, time). (60 seconds) is set, and when the touch detection changes to a state different from that of the touch detection, the production prohibition timer starts counting. That is, processing for controlling the touch effect is not executed for a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) after the last touch change is recognized.

It should be noted that the effect prohibition timer is set when both the touch detection changes from “No ⇒ Yes” and when the touch detection changes to “Yes ⇒ No”. It is possible to prepare for each case.
<<Example of production output in the state of the adjustment screen>>

Next, an example of production output in the state of the “adjustment screen” related to the environment setting (customization) described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the state of the “adjustment screen”, the “control state” becomes “during initial setting” when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored (recovery from power loss), the “normal mode” is entered. It has shifted to a standby state (game standby state) such as. Then, the environment is set in the "adjustment screen" state, the environment setting is completed, and the process shifts to the standby state. Further, in relation to the game state shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, “B13: game standby C (screen for setting effects, voice, etc.)” of “B1: game standby state”, “B11: game standby A (normal) "Demo display)" is supported.

In the example of FIG. 29, when the power is restored, the “image display” of the “state corresponding output” is the “standby screen A”. Furthermore, “voice output” is not performed, and “lamp display” is “demo display”.

As shown in the bottom of the figure, when the "effect button" is operated, the "image display" becomes the "adjustment screen" at the timing of ending the operation detection. Further, the “voice output” becomes “voice during adjustment (irregular)”, which outputs (sample output) the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment operation (adjusted volume) or adjusts the screen (eg, FIG. 33). The operation sound of the cursor movement in (c)) can be output. Further, in this case, since the adjustment operation is required to be input, it is treated as “irregular”.

Furthermore, the “lamp display” is “light emission during adjustment”. This outputs light according to the emission brightness (light quantity) set at that time. Note that, in the example of FIG. 29, the button operation of the “effect button” is detected, and the “state corresponding output” is performed based on the timing when the detection of the operation is finished, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the button The “state-corresponding output” may be performed based on the timing at which the operation detection is started.

In this state, if there is "touch detection", "image display" in "touch effect" is not performed, but "voice effect" and "lamp effect" are performed in a touch notification mode. By thus preventing the "image display" from being performed, it is possible to prevent the work of environment setting (customization) performed while viewing the screen display. Further, when the adjustment operation is completed as shown in the central portion of the uppermost stage in the figure, the “image display” of the “state corresponding output” becomes the “standby screen A”. Furthermore, although "voice output" is not performed, the "lamp display" can be in the "demo display" mode.

In the example of FIG. 29, when there is “touch detection” after the adjustment operation is completed, the touch notification is performed by “image display”, “sound effect”, and “lamp display”. Then, when there is a touch notification at this time, the "image display" of the "state corresponding output" is switched from the "standby screen A" to the "standby screen B". It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to an effect such as a change from the "standby screen A" to the "standby screen B". For example, a touch notification (such as a "welcome" character display) may be superimposed on the "standby screen A". Then, after that, the screen may shift to the “standby screen B”.

Further, in the example of FIG. 29, the effect inhibition timer is cleared when the power is restored and is set when the touch is detected. Further, the timing is started based on the timing of the end of the touch detection, and after that, the value of the effect prohibition timer is "0". Furthermore, the effect inhibition timer is set by the subsequent touch detection, and timing is started based on the timing of the end of the touch detection.

In the example of FIG. 29, the setting is not changed (normal) and the power is restored. Therefore, the performance prohibition timer is cleared after the power is restored, and it is determined whether or not the effect prohibition timer before the power was cut off. Regardless of this, execution of touch production is allowed.
<<Example of performance output in reach screen>>

Next, an example of effect output in the state where the reach effect is being performed (the state of the reach screen) will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the state of the “reach screen”, when the variation start condition of the special symbol (and the effect symbol) is satisfied, the “control state” is indicated by the rising edge of the “during symbol variation” diagram. Then, the symbol fluctuation is started. At this time, since the game is normally being played, the "touch detection" continues to be detected.

In the example of FIG. 30, the “image display” of the “state corresponding output” is the “standby screen B” until the symbol variation starts. Further, the "voice output" is the output of "BGM" corresponding to the "standby screen B", and the "lamp display" is the "demo display". When the symbol variation starts in this state, the “image display” becomes the “acceleration effect”. As this "acceleration effect", it is possible to exemplify one in which the effect pattern (190) is started to change and accelerated to high speed change.

Further, in the example of FIG. 30, after the state of “preliminary notice effect/listening tile (temple) incentive production” in the “image display”, the state becomes “pattern listening tile”, and reach is generated. Here, "preliminary notice effect/tempered fanning effect, etc." means, for example, an effect having contents that inspire the expectation of reach occurrence through various notice effects. In addition, as the “symbol listening tile”, for example, an effect for causing the player to hold the expectation that the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped for the second constitutes a combination of the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped for the first and the reach it can. Then, in the "image display", the "reach effect" is executed, and thereafter, the effect of "symbol stop" is executed in a mode according to the result of the winning/winning lottery.

Further, in the "voice output", with the start of the symbol variation, "symbol changing voice" associated with the changing effect of the effect symbol 190 is output. Further, in the "lamp display", with the start of the symbol variation, the "symbol changing lamp effect" associated with the effect in effect of the effect symbol 190 is being performed.

In such a reach effect, it is conceivable to execute, as the “touch effect”, one for keeping the player from releasing the firing handle (20). For example, in the example of FIG. 30, the state with “touch detection” that has been continuing until then is once interrupted during the “reach effect”. Then, after that, there is the second “touch detection” in the period shown in FIG. 30, and after a certain detection period, the state is changed to the state without “touch detection”. Then, based on the timing when the second touch detection is stopped, "predetermined display" is performed in "image display" of "touch effect", "predetermined voice" is output in "voice effect", and "lamp" is output. "Predetermined light emission" is performed in the "effect".

As these "predetermined display", "predetermined voice", and "predetermined light emission", it is possible to execute a notification effect regarding a game result or an effect for suppressing a game stop. For example, it is conceivable to output directly or indirectly the expectation level regarding the occurrence of a reach or a big hit, or to output a “predetermined display” or a “predetermined voice” of the content of “Keep your hands on”. To be Further, the character display (382) of "heat!" in FIG. 37(b) described above also corresponds to the "predetermined display" here. Further, when the production of “voice” and the production of “lamp” are involved, these correspond to “predetermined voice” and “predetermined light emission”.

Here, in the example of FIG. 30, counting without "touch detection" is started based on the start timing of "reach effect". Then, the first detection of the state without "touch detection" after the start of the "reach effect" becomes the first "touch detection" without detection, and the subsequent detection of the state without "touch detection" in the example of FIG. There is no "touch detection" for the second time.
<<Example of production output in the state of the big hit end demo screen>>

Next, an example of effect output in a state where the big hit end demonstration effect is being performed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 31, the "control state" changes from the normal control state to the big hit control state when the big hit starts, and when the big winning opening/closing control (round control related to the big hit game) ends, the big hit end demonstration state is set. Become. Furthermore, when the state of the big hit demonstration ends, it returns to the state of normal control. Here, in the example of FIG. 31, the big hit start demonstration is performed before the big hit start, but the big hit start demonstration is omitted for the "control state".

When the big hit is started, the "image display" of the "state-corresponding output" shifts from the "symbol stop" effect until then to the "big hit mid effect". The "effects during big hit" here include effects during and between rounds. Furthermore, the "voice output" shifts from the "symbol change" that has been used up to that time to the "major jackpot performance". The "major jackpot effect" relating to the "voice output" here includes a voice indicating the progress of the round (round progress voice) and an output of winning sound during the round (winning sound output).

Also, the "lamp display" shifts from the "demo display" up to then to the "big hit mid-stage production". The "major jackpot effect" relating to the "lamp display" here includes effects for during the rounds and between the rounds. Then, each "major hit performance" relating to these "image display", "voice output", and "lamp display" is performed until the end of the special winning opening/closing control. In the example of FIG. 31, the “touch detection” at this time continues to be in the state of “touch detection”.

When the special winning opening/closing control is completed, the “image display” and the “lamp display” of the “state-corresponding output” shift to the respective “big hit end demonstration display”. Further, the "voice output" shifts to "big hit end demo BGM or the like". Further, when the big hit demonstration ends, the "image display" shifts to "stop symbols". Furthermore, "voice output" and "lamp display" are stopped during "symbol stop". Then, when the “stop of symbol” of the “image display” is completed, the “voice output” becomes “BGM”, and the “lamp display” becomes in accordance with the state of the gaming machine thereafter.

Here, in FIG. 31, the reason why the characters are not described in the diagram relating to the "lamp display" after the "symbol stop" is finished (the reason why it is blank) depends on the state of the gaming machine. It is difficult to identify in the figure. In the example of FIG. 31, the “voice output” and the “lamp display” are stopped during the “symbol stop”, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, BGM during the symbol stop (the game mode at that time) BGM or the like) or a lamp display pattern may be provided to output these.

In the example of FIG. 31, after the special winning opening/closing control is completed, the “touch detection” state is temporarily turned off, and the state is changed to the “touch detection” state during the subsequent jackpot end demonstration. Furthermore, during the big hit end demonstration, a change to a state without “touch detection” and a change to a state with “touch detection” are performed.

Regarding "touch effect", "predetermined display" related to "image effect" and "predetermined sound" related to "voice effect" based on the timing when "touch detection" is initially not performed during the big hit end demonstration. , "Predetermined light emission" related to "lamp effect" is also executed. The “predetermined display”, “predetermined voice”, and “predetermined light emission” at this time are, for example, effects for preventing forgetting to take a game card or a game coin that stores the amount of game media, and a game result during jackpot control. An example of an effect for notification can be given.

In the example of FIG. 31, the subsequent touch detection is the first detection of “touch detection”. Further, the subsequent touch detection during the jackpot end demonstration is regarded as the second detection of "touch detection". Then, based on the timing of the second "touch detection", "predetermined display" related to "image effect", "predetermined voice" related to "voice effect", and "predetermined light emission" related to "lamp effect". Is executed together.

As described above, when the “predetermined display”, the “predetermined sound”, and the “predetermined light emission” are performed a plurality of times (here, twice) during the same type of period (here, during the big hit end demonstration), the “predetermined display” is displayed. , "Predetermined voice", "predetermined light emission", it is desirable to have different elements such as content and type. For example, when the effect for preventing forgetting to take a game card or game coin is executed as the previous “touch effect”, the effect for informing about the game result during the big hit control is performed as the subsequent “touch effect”. , It is possible to exemplify, for example, performing an effect of content that promotes motivation for the next game.

As above, based on FIG. 28 to FIG. 31, the example of the output output in some states of the gaming machine has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to consider the example of output output in other states. is there.
<Example of performance output after power is restored>
<<In the case of a game standby state (any of display screens A to C) when the power is turned off>>

Next, an example of the effect output after the power failure is restored will be described. FIG. 32A conceptually shows the screen display control when the power of the gaming machine is in the game standby state and then, when the power is turned on again (power is restored). .. Here, as the game standby state, the above-mentioned "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)", "B12: game standby B (stopping symbols)", "B13: game standby C (production, voice, etc. setting) "Screen") (standby screen A, standby screen B, effect setting screen C, etc.) can be illustrated.

When the power is restored as shown in the left end portion of FIG. 32A after the power is cut off in the above-described various game machine standby states, the sub control means (here, the CPU 521 of the sub main board 301) is its own. After performing the initialization process, it waits for a command (power supply restoration command) indicating the power restoration from the main control unit (here, the CPU 501 of the main board 102).

At this time, no image is displayed on the image display device (here, the effect display device 60) (corresponding to “screen non-display” in the figure). After that, the sub-main CPU 521 receives the power restoration command from the main CPU 501, and it is determined from the content of the command, that the RWM is not cleared or the setting is changed at the time of restoration, and that the game state is in the game standby state. Then, the power recovery process based on the condition is performed, and the initialization process ends.

When the initialization process is completed (corresponding to "ready" in the figure), the sub-main CPU 521 performs normal processes (processes for updating random numbers for effect production, lamp display control, voice control, etc.) and at the same time, the effect display device. The sub-main command for displaying the standby screen A is output to (60) regardless of which of the standby screens A to C was the display screen before the power was turned off. Further, after the sub-main CPU 521 clears the value of the clock timer for changing the screen (sets it to a predetermined value), it executes power-on notification processing for notifying that the power is restored without clearing the RWM.

As an example of the effect display by the power-on notification process, for example, the effect display device (60) is displayed with the characters "Power is restored" and "Energized" shown in FIG. For example, the LED of 11) may be turned on in a predetermined lighting pattern. Furthermore, it is conceivable that the effect display by the power-on notification process is continuously executed for a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds). In addition, in the present embodiment, even when the power-on notification is executed after the initialization process is completed, the operation means (the operation button (22) which is an effect button) is operated by the normal process described above. It is possible to judge the input and change the standby screen according to the input. Such power-on notification processing and normal processing are shown as "power-on notification" and "normal processing (individual processing, command/operation means input waiting)" in the figure. Further, “individual processing” means individual display control processing, random number updating processing, timing processing, and the like.

As described above, after the initialization timer completes the initialization of the clock timer, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed based on the clock timer (the value of the clock timer becomes "0" by subtraction). If the timer counts up, or if the clock timer reaches a predetermined value (30 seconds in this case), it is determined that the standby screen display change time (corresponding to “time A”) has arrived, and the screen display waits. Change from screen A to standby screen B. Then, a value that corresponds to the time when the standby screen B changes to the standby screen A again is set in the clock timer. For example, if the time counting timer is to add, the arrival time "20 seconds" is set, and if the time counting timer is to subtract, a value required to reach "0" (for example, 2 ms). (10000, etc., which becomes 0 in 20 seconds by subtraction for each interrupt) is set.

Then, as in the case of the standby screen A, when a predetermined time elapses after the standby screen B is displayed (for example, when the clock timer is subtracted and becomes “0”, or when the clock timer is added). In the case of "20 seconds" or the like), it is determined that the display change time of the standby screen (corresponding to "time B") has arrived, and the screen display is changed from the standby screen B to the standby screen A. In addition, when the game is played while the standby screen A or the standby screen B is displayed, and the player wins at the starting winning opening (62, 63), the screen changes to the symbol variation screen, and when the firing handle 20 is touched. Causes a screen transition to the content corresponding to the touch detection (such as the superimposed display of the character "Welcome"). In the example of FIG. 32A, it is assumed that neither the operation button (22) is operated nor the touch is detected.
<<When the design is changing when the power is turned off>>

Next, based on FIG. 32(b), an example of effect output in the case where the design is changing when the power is cut off will be described. FIG. 32(b) is a concept of screen display control when the power supply is cut off when the design is changing and the hold is not generated, and then the power supply is turned on again (the power supply is restored). It is shown in the figure.

As described above, when the power is restored after the power is cut off in the state where the number of holdings is 0 and the design is being changed, the sub-main CPU 521 first performs its own initialization processing, and then receives a power return command from the main CPU 501. wait. At this point in time, no image is displayed on the effect display device (60) (corresponding to "screen non-display" in the figure). After that, when a power restoration command is received from the main CPU 501 and it is determined from the contents of the command that RWM clear or setting change is not involved at the time of restoration, or that the gaming state is changing the symbol, the condition is concerned. The power recovery process based on the above is performed, and the initialization process ends.

When the initialization process is completed (corresponding to "ready" in the figure), the sub-main CPU 521 causes the effect display device (60) to display a power-on notification screen (for example, "power is turned on" or Fig. 35(b). ) Is displayed and a display indicating that the pattern is being changed) is displayed, and the state is maintained until a pattern stop command is received from the main board 102. In the present embodiment, the power-on notification made during the standby screen and the screen display are different. As an example of the presentation of the power-on notification (power-on notification screen) at this time, the one shown in FIG. 35B can be adopted. Even after the initialization process is completed, even if the power-on notification is being executed, the input of the operation means (effect button) is determined by the normal process, and if the input is valid, the input is made. It is possible to execute processing according to. Such output of power-on notification and normal processing are shown as "power-on notification screen" and "normal processing (individual processing, command/operation means input waiting)" in the figure. Further, “individual processing” means individual display control processing, random number updating processing, timing processing, and the like.

In the CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301, when a symbol stop command is received from the main board 102 (corresponding to “stop command” in the figure), information of the symbol stop command, or a symbol according to information based on the power restoration command (in advance) When the symbol to be stopped can be grasped by the determined default symbol combination and information, the screen in which the symbol is stopped and displayed, that is, the symbol change standby similar to the standby screen B as shown in FIG. 34(c) Display the screen. Here, in the present embodiment, when the symbol is changing at the time of power-off (power-on), the timer is not initialized because the initialization process is completed, and the timer is received at the timing when the stop command is received. Setting process is performed, and the standby screen B is always set to be displayed after the stop command is received.

After that, as in the case of the game standby, after the standby screen B is displayed, when a predetermined time elapses (when the timer counts down to "0" or when the timer is added, When the display change time of the standby screen (corresponding to "time B" in the drawing) has arrived, the screen display is changed from the standby screen B to the standby screen A. In addition, when the game is played while the power-on notification screen is displayed and the player has won the start winning opening (62, 63), after displaying the standby screen B in response to the reception of the stop command, the screen changes to the symbol variation screen. Also, when the firing handle (20) is touched, a screen transition is made to the content in response to the touch detection (such as the superimposed display of the character "Welcome").

Although not shown, in both cases of FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b), the initial operation confirmation process that is normally performed for the movable effect member that is the movable accessory is the initialization process. It can be executed later in parallel with these display processes, etc., and the process is executed until the confirmation of the initial operation of the movable accessory is completed, regardless of the display transition of the screen. 32(a) and (b), while the operation for confirming the movable accessory is performed). Further, until the confirmation of the initial operation of the movable accessory is completed, the execution of the effect of the movable accessory due to the variation of the symbol is controlled. In the example of FIG. 32(b), it is assumed that neither the operation button (22) is operated nor the touch is detected. Further, the effect pattern in which the movable accessory operates is selected by the operation of the operation button (22) by the player, and the effect pattern is generated (executed) during the initial operation of the movable effect member, and the player is actually When the operation button (22) is operated, execution of the effect of the movable effect member (actual driving) is restricted.
<Touch detection, touch production and other characteristics>

The touch detection and touch effects described so far can be considered as follows. First, for the touch effect (shooting detection effect) executed during standby (during standby screen A or standby screen B), the game is actually detected by detecting the firing operation (touch detection and change in firing intensity volume). The execution time of the touch effect is shorter than the actual measurement value (for example, the average value of a plurality of actual measurements) until the ball is fired and enters the starting winning opening (for example, the first starting winning opening 62). can do. The touch effect in this case is considered to be completed in about 3 seconds.

On the contrary, for the touch effect (shooting detection effect) executed during standby (during the standby screen A or the standby screen B), detection of the firing operation (touch detection and detection of change in firing intensity volume) is performed. Therefore, the execution time of the touch effect is longer than the actual measurement value (for example, the average value of a plurality of actual measurements) until the game ball is actually fired and enters the starting winning opening (for example, the first starting winning opening 62). It may be made longer, and in that case, the touch effect may be about 20 seconds. In that case, if a notice effect is generated in response to a ball entering the first start winning opening (62) during the execution of the touch effect for 20 seconds, this notice effect is performed in a predetermined first group (for example, if the characters are If it is a simple notice such as a line announcement of the content that utters a line, the touch effect is kept running, and this notice effect is used for another predetermined second group (for example, a movie notification that uses the full screen of the display device). In the case of a non-simplified notice, the touch effect may be interrupted.

Further, although not normally possible, even if the touch detection is performed after the rotating operation of the firing handle (20) (while the handle is rotating), the touch effect (emission detection effect) can be executed.

Furthermore, when there is a winning opening prize during execution of the touch effect (shooting detection effect), it is possible not to interrupt the touch effect. However, in the case of a touch effect such as a voice, the volume may be set to “zero” and continued depending on the priority of the effect at the time of winning the start opening. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and if there is a start winning a prize during execution of the touch effect (shooting detection effect), the touch effect may be interrupted.

Furthermore, when an error is detected and error notification is executed during execution of the touch effect, the error notification can be prioritized over the touch effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the touch effect and the error notification may be output in duplicate. For example, if the first error (illegal winning error, porcelain detection error, etc.) is detected, the touch effect is interrupted, but if the second error (improper firing direction error, door opening error, etc.), the touch effect is not interrupted. A control mode can be adopted.

Further, when the touch effect is executed during the volume adjustment at the time of customization (environment setting), even if the volume adjustment is in progress, the sound output related to the touch effect is output according to the volume adjusted at the start time of the touch effect. It is possible to do it.

Further, it is possible to prohibit the touch effect during volume adjustment during customization (environment setting) and not execute the touch effect even if the touch effect is performed in other situations. is there.

Further, the touch effect (shooting detection effect) is interrupted when a game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (62, 63) during execution, but it is stopped at the operating opening (68) or the general winning opening (72). It is also possible to adopt a control mode in which the game ball is not interrupted when it is detected.
<Operation detection signal>

Next, various possible examples of operation detection signals (touch detection signals) related to touch detection will be described. As described so far, when considering various aspects of the effect output related to the touch effect, the operation detection signal related to the touch detection operation may be specifically examined, the reliability of the effect control, etc. may be ensured. Is important in terms of. First, regarding the operation detection signal, it is possible to consider "1. Use of the operation detection signal", "2. Transmission method of the operation detection signal", "3a. Processing when the operation detection signal is received", etc. To be

Among these, “1. Use of operation detection signal” can be used for various processes and can be used as a trigger for various processes. For example, the operation detection signal may be “(1) guarantee of operation by player”. Further, the operation detection signal includes “(2) Trigger for transition between demo state and normal state”, “(3) Trigger for transition to special effect state”, “(4) Trigger for returning from power saving mode”, “( 5) External output trigger”, “(6) Suggestion (method change) such as launch”, “(7) Use for production (trigger of)”, “(8) Use for fixed handle detection and notification”, “( 9) It is used to change the production frequency etc.”.

In addition, as a signal generation method when the operation detection signal is used as the above-mentioned “(2) Trigger of transition between demo state and normal state”, the detection signal of the touch detection unit is a dedicated detection unit for the sub-main board (301). It is possible to adopt the method (first method) of outputting from. As a dedicated detection unit for the sub-main substrate 301, a touch detection unit (touch sensor) in which an output signal is input only to the sub-main substrate (301) can be cited.

Further, as another signal generation method, it is also possible to adopt a method (second method) in which the signal (detection signal) of the above-mentioned dedicated detection unit is subjected to some processing (signal processing) and used. In this case, it is premised that a common detection unit (shared detection unit) whose output signal is input to both the main board (102) and the sub-main board (301) is used, and a signal from the common detection section is used. It is possible to perform some processing (signal processing) before use.

Furthermore, a method (third method) of synthesizing the output signal of the dedicated detection unit or the shared detection unit with another signal can be considered. In this case, the output signal of the dedicated detection unit or the shared detection unit is combined with the information of the output status appearing in "another signal", and the main board (102) or the sub-board is used as a reference signal for detection related to the change of the operation state. It is conceivable to output to the main board (301).

A feature of the first method and the second method described above is that since it does not need to be combined with other signals, it does not require processing or equipment for signal generation, as compared to the third method. It may be possible to simplify the configuration.

Another feature of the above-mentioned second method is that the generation of input signals to a plurality of different input targets (here, the main board (102) and the sub-main board (301)) can be made common, so that individual input can be performed. In some cases, the processing and the device configuration can be simplified as compared with the case where the input signal is individually generated for the target. Considering the influence of chattering on the touch switch (310) and the like, it is conceivable that a touch for a certain period of time (for example, 50 ms) or more is a requirement to improve the detection accuracy. Of course, by using a capacitor having an appropriate electrostatic capacity, it is possible to obtain an output at the time of continuous detection for a predetermined time.

Further, as a feature of the third method, processing on the main board (102) or the sub-main board (301) is performed by using a signal of a form other than the form of the output signal of the dedicated detection unit or the common detection unit. it can. Therefore, it is possible to perform processing on the main board (102) and the sub-main board (301) without being limited to the form of the output signal of the dedicated detection section or the common detection section.

Regarding the above-mentioned “2. Method of transmitting operation detection signal”, the processing form in each control board can be considered according to the transmission path of the operation detection signal. For example, regarding the section from the touch sensor (310) to the firing control board (105), the signal line used for transmission from the touch sensor (310) is “(1) Common for firing control”. Alternatively, it can be considered as “(2) Separate from the one for launch control”.

Here, as a mode in which the signal lines are common, if the touch sensor (310) is a three-wire type sensor, three signal lines (power supply line, output line) derived from the touch sensor (310) are used. If the touch sensor (310) is a two-wire type sensor, the two signal lines (output signal line and GND) derived from the touch sensor (310) are used. , Or an output signal line and a power supply line are commonly used.

In addition, regarding the section from the launch control board (105) to the prize ball control board (payout control board 103), the signal line used for transmission is “(1) independent signal line (output only for performance)”. Or "(2) common to other control signals". Among these, in the case of “(2) common to other control signals”, it is conceivable to adopt a form (combining form) of combining by a method such as different transmission timing.

Furthermore, regarding the section from the prize ball control board (payout control board 103) to the main control board (main board 102), “(1) Independent signal line” or “(2) Other control signal” is used. It can be considered as “common”. Among these, in the case of “(2) common to other control signals”, transmission/reception is performed in the form of a command (command format), or a form of combining by a technique such as different transmission timing (combining form) It is possible to send and receive with. Regarding the transmission timing, it is possible to consider a signal transmission mode such as not transmitting in a specific case.

Further, regarding the section from the main control board (main board 102) to the effect control board (sub-main board 301), "(1) independent signal line" or "(2) common to other control signals" Is possible. Among these, in the case of “(1) independent signal line”, for example, it is conceivable that signals are transmitted and received at regular intervals (periodically). In the case of “(2) common to other control signals”, the transmission/reception is performed in the command format as in the section from the prize ball control board (payout control board 103) to the main control board (main board 102). It is conceivable to use a composite format. Furthermore, it is conceivable that the signal transmission timing is determined based on the relationship with the content and type of the previous transmission information.

Subsequently, the above-mentioned “3a. Process when receiving operation detection signal” can be considered separately for various game states. And, as the game state, "(1) normal game in progress", "(2) special game (hit game) in progress", "(3) abnormal", "(4) preparing (power failure recovery/power failure) Processing)”, “(5) demo in progress (not yet operated)”, and “(6) demo in progress (my patch operation/effect setting operation)”.

Among these game states, there are a high base state and a low base state in "(1) normal game". Further, when the firing control board (105) receives an operation detection signal related to touch detection, it is conceivable to perform “(1) only firing control processing when common to firing processing”. This means that when the touch detection signal is received at the same time as the processing related to the firing control, only the processing related to the firing control is performed and the processing based on the touch detection signal is not performed. There is.

It is also possible to consider "(2) Ignore if different from firing control". This means that when the touch detection signal is received when the process related to the firing control is not performed, the process based on the touch detection is not performed.

Subsequently, in the prize ball control board (payout control board 103) and the main control board (main board 102), it is conceivable to store information relating to touch detection until a command to be transmitted is transmitted. Further, in the main control board (main board 102), based on the information of the touch detection, the effect lottery such as the variation pattern (variation P) lottery is influenced or not given. It is possible to do so.

Subsequently, in the effect control board (sub-main board 301), the selection target is branched in determining an effect (variation effect, pre-reading effect, etc.) different from the effect related to the win or failure based on the touch detection information ( If different, select the production). Further, even if the information based on the touch detection is received, it is possible that the process based on the information is not performed, or the determination process of receiving the information is performed but no special process is performed.

The processing related to "(1) normal game" described here is performed in other "(2) special game (hit game)", "(3) abnormal", "(4) preparing (power). It is also possible to appropriately employ it in a state such as “power failure recovery/power interruption processing)”, “(5) demo in progress (not yet operated)”, and “(6) demo in progress (my patch operation/effect setting operation)”. Here, the "my-pachi operation" is, for example, displaying a two-dimensional code for providing information to the player, or communicating with the mobile information terminal (smartphone, etc.) of the player through communication with the Internet server. It means an operation for providing a service such as performing. Further, the “production setting operation” means an operation for the above-mentioned environment setting (customization).
<Advantageous effects of the invention according to the present embodiment>

As described above, various control elements are examined with respect to the relationship between the touch detection and the effect output, and appropriate control elements are adopted from the examined ones and applied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 to thereby control various control elements. It is possible to execute the production based on the above. Then, it becomes possible to more effectively utilize the detection of the operation of the firing handle including the touch detection than ever before.

For example, as described above, "D: content of touch effect" is assumed variously, and subdivided into "D1: effect output destination", "D2: effect data", "D3: only change state", for example. By decimating and controlling the control process relating to the effect output and adopting it to the pachinko game machine 10, various effects based on the steering wheel operation can be performed. The effect based on the handle operation is further subdivided based on control elements such as "D1: effect output destination", "D2: effect data", and "D3: only change state". It is possible to

In addition, as described above, various assumptions are made regarding "E: selection criteria for touch effect", for example, "E1: game state (at touch timing)", "E2: number of operations", "E3: customized setting". By subdividing the control processing relating to the performance output and adopting it to the pachinko gaming machine 10, various performances based on the steering wheel operation are possible. Then, the effect based on the steering wheel operation is a content that is further subdivided based on control elements such as "E1: game state (at touch timing)", "E2: number of operations", "E3: customization setting". It is possible to

Similarly, for the above-mentioned "F: change of effect state", "G: change of effect", "H: thing related to trigger parameter of touch effect", etc., similarly, various kinds of subdivided control elements are defined. By adopting the machine 10, various effects based on the steering wheel operation are possible. Further, the permission condition and the regulation condition of the effect are set as "J: Setting of permission timing", and as other control elements, "K: change of touch state", "L: touch detection method", "M: go to sub". , Etc., etc., and these are appropriately selected and applied to the pachinko gaming machine 10, so that the effect based on the steering wheel operation can be made more diverse.

Then, by carefully examining the touch effect as described above and executing the touch effect according to the state of the gaming machine, the touch effect in a mode in consideration of the balance with the effect continued before the touch detection. Can be performed. The touch effect can be combined with other effects without hindering other effects, and the touch effects can be diversified by this combination.

Further, by executing the touch effect for each of a plurality of touch detections, it is possible to diversify the entire effect by continuing the intermittent touch effect.
<Summary of Examples>

As above, various aspects of the effects based on the touch detection have been exemplified, but these can be summarized as follows.
<Summary 1>
The invention according to this embodiment shoots a game ball in the game area, and the game ball enters the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the playing area. At the opportunity, as a symbol game, the symbols (special symbols, etc.) are variably displayed and then stopped and displayed, and when the symbols that are stopped and displayed are in a predetermined display mode, a special game that can give a profit to the player is performed. There, main control means (main board etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game, and transmission information (main command etc.) transmitted from the main control means communicably connected to the main control means. A sub-control unit (sub-main board or the like) that performs control processing according to the above, a production output unit (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, or the like) that outputs a production under the control of the sub-control unit, and a player. The touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting the contact of the player and the rotation operation detection means (emission strength volume or the like) for detecting the rotation operation of the player are provided, and in the effect, the player by the touch detection means is provided. There is something that is output when the touch detection, which is the detection of the touch of the user, is triggered (touch effect, etc.),
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state ("B1: game standby state (normal demo display)" or the like) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is being executed, and the symbol game There is a game in-execution state (“B2: in-game state” or the like), which is a state in which one of the special games is being executed, and in the game standby state, output contents of the effect by the sub-control means. Includes a plurality of different types of game standby states (such as "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)" to "B14: game standby (power saving)"), any of the plurality of types of game standby states Depending on the state, whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection and/or the output effect triggered by the touch detection may be different.
Thereby, various effects can be executed by more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 2>

In another invention according to the present embodiment, a game ball is shot in a game area, and the game ball enters a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the playing area. As a result, the symbols (special symbols, etc.) are variably displayed as a symbol game, and then stopped and displayed, and when the symbols that are stopped and displayed are in a predetermined display mode, a special game capable of giving a profit to the player is performed. A main control means (main board etc.) for controlling the progress of a game including the symbol game, and communication information connected to the main control means and transmitted from the main control means (main command Contact with a player, a sub-control unit (sub-main board, etc.) that performs control processing according to the above) A touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a rotation operation, and a rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting a rotation operation of the player, wherein the effect output means includes a touch detection means for the player. Output of sound (sound output, etc.) can be executed in response to touch detection which is detection of contact, and as the state of the pachinko gaming machine, neither the symbol game nor the special game is being executed. A game standby state (such as "B1: game standby state (normal demo display)") and a game execution state in which one of the symbol game and the special game is being executed ("B2: game state" , Etc.) and the game standby state includes a plurality of types of game standby states (“B11: game standby A (normal demo display)” to “B14: game standby (while saving power)”, etc.), Depending on which one of the plurality of types of game standby states is in the game standby state, whether the voice is output triggered by the touch detection and/or the voice output triggered by the touch detection Are configured to be different.
As a result, various voice effects can be executed by more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 3>

Another invention according to the present embodiment is to shoot a game ball into a game area, and the game ball enters a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the playing area. As a result, the symbols (special symbols, etc.) are variably displayed as a symbol game, and then stopped and displayed, and when the symbols that are stopped and displayed are in a predetermined display mode, a special game capable of giving a profit to the player is performed. Machine,
Main control means (main board or the like) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game,
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting the contact of the player,
A rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting the rotation operation of the player,
And a production operation unit (operation buttons, arrow keys, etc.) operated by the player during production,
Some of the effects (touch effects, etc.) are output in response to touch detection, which is detection of contact of the player by the touch detection means,
As a state of the pachinko gaming machine, having a game standby state ("B1: game standby state (normal demo display)" etc.) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is being executed,
In the game standby state, a plurality of types of game standby states in which the output contents of the effect by the sub-control unit are different ("B11: game standby A (normal demo display)" to "B14: game standby (power saving)", etc.) Including
Whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and/or, the effect execution conditions are set so that the output output triggered by the touch detection may be different,
The conditions defined as the effect execution conditions include which game standby state among the plurality of types of game standby states, at which timing the touch detection is performed, and before the touch detection timing. Includes whether or not the effect operation unit has been operated.
As a result, it is possible to execute the touch effect associated with the operation status of the effect operation unit while more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 4>

Another invention according to the present embodiment is to shoot a game ball into a game area, and the game ball enters a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the playing area. As a result, the symbols (special symbols, etc.) are variably displayed as a symbol game, and then stopped and displayed, and when the symbols that are stopped and displayed are in a predetermined display mode, a special game capable of giving a profit to the player is performed. Machine,
Main control means (main board or the like) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game,
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting the contact of the player,
And a rotation operation detecting means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting the rotation operation of the player,
Some of the effects (touch effects, etc.) are output in response to touch detection, which is detection of contact of the player by the touch detection means,
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state ("B1: game standby state (normal demo display)" or the like) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is being executed, and the symbol game Has a game in-execution state (“B2: in-game state” or the like), which is a state in which any of the special games is being executed,
The pachinko gaming machine is provided with a backup means (such as a backup area of the main board) capable of storing the gaming state of the pachinko machine when the power is cut off when the power is cut off due to a decrease in the supply voltage,
Whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and/or, the effect execution conditions are set so that the output output triggered by the touch detection may be different,
The conditions defined as the effect execution conditions include the timing of the touch detection and the gaming state of the pachinko machine stored in the backup means when the power is restored. In the game standby state, a plurality of types of game standby states in which the output contents of the effect by the sub-control unit are different ("B11: game standby A (normal demo display)" to "B14: game standby (power saving)", etc.) Including
Depending on which one of the plurality of types of game standby states is in the game standby state, whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and/or the output which is triggered by the touch detection. Are configured to be different.
As a result, it is possible to more appropriately utilize the operation detection of the firing handle and execute an appropriate touch effect immediately after the power is turned on.
<Summary 5>

In another invention according to the present embodiment, a game ball is shot in a game area, and the game ball enters a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the playing area. A special game that can give a profit to the player when the symbols (special symbols, etc.) are variably displayed and then stopped and displayed, and the symbols that are stopped and displayed are in a predetermined display mode. It is a pachinko game machine to perform,
As the time period for which the symbols are variably displayed as the symbol game, one variation time period is set from a plurality of variation time periods,
Main control means (main board or the like) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game,
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting the contact of the player,
A rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting the rotation operation of the player,
And a time measuring means (time measuring timer, etc.) for measuring time,
Some of the effects (touch effects, etc.) are output in response to touch detection, which is detection of contact of the player by the touch detection means,
As a state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is being executed (such as "B1: game standby state (normal demo display)"),
It has a game execution state (“B2: game state” or the like), which is a state in which one of the symbol game and the special game is being executed,
Clocking the elapsed time in the game standby state based on the clocking means,
An initialization means for setting the time count of the time measurement means to an initial value based on the touch detection;
When the elapsed time in the game standby state reaches a predetermined time by the time counting means, output of the effect triggered by the subsequent touch detection is allowed (“J11: time characteristic (variable/1 change and Comparison)”, etc.),
The predetermined time is set to be shorter than the longest fluctuation time (180 seconds or the like) of the plurality of fluctuation times.
As a result, it is possible to appropriately set the allowable timing of the touch effect while more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 6>

In another invention according to the present embodiment, a game ball is shot in a game area, and the game ball enters a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the playing area. A special game that can give a profit to the player when the symbols (special symbols, etc.) are variably displayed and then stopped and displayed, and the symbols that are stopped and displayed are in a predetermined display mode. It is a pachinko game machine to perform,
As the time period for which the symbols are variably displayed as the symbol game, one variation time period is set from a plurality of variation time periods,
Main control means (main board or the like) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game,
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting the contact of the player,
A rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting the rotation operation of the player,
A production operation unit operated by the player during production,
And a time measuring means (time measuring timer, etc.) for measuring time,
Some of the effects (touch effects, etc.) are output in response to touch detection, which is detection of contact of the player by the touch detection means,
As a state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is being executed (such as "B1: game standby state (normal demo display)"),
It has a game execution state (“B2: game state” or the like), which is a state in which one of the symbol game and the special game is being executed,
The elapsed time in a predetermined game standby state is measured based on the time measuring means,
An initialization means for setting the time count of the time measurement means to an initial value based on the touch detection;
When the elapsed time in the game standby state reaches a predetermined time by the time counting means, output of the effect triggered by the subsequent touch detection is allowed (“J2: compound with other elements” or the like). ,
Even if the effect operation unit is operated before the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time (20 seconds or the like) in the game standby state, if the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time, subsequent touch detection The output of the performance triggered by is permitted.
Thereby, the touch effect can be executed regardless of the operation of the effect operation unit while more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 7>

Another invention according to the present embodiment is to shoot a game ball into a game area, and the game ball enters a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the playing area. As a result, the symbols (special symbols, etc.) are variably displayed as a symbol game, and then stopped and displayed, and when the symbols that are stopped and displayed are in a predetermined display mode, a special game capable of giving a profit to the player is performed. Machine,
Main control means (main board or the like) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game,
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting the contact of the player,
A rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting the rotation operation of the player,
And a time measuring means (time measuring timer, etc.) for measuring time,
Some of the effects (touch effects, etc.) are output in response to touch detection, which is detection of contact of the player by the touch detection means,
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state ("B1: game standby state (normal demo display)" or the like) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is being executed, and the symbol game Has a game in-execution state (“B2: in-game state” or the like), which is a state in which any of the special games is being executed,
The pachinko gaming machine is provided with a backup means (such as a backup area of the main board) capable of storing the gaming state of the pachinko machine when the power is cut off when the power is cut off due to a decrease in the supply voltage,
When returning from the power-off, a normal return operation for returning the game state of the pachinko machine after the power is restored to the game state of the pachinko machine before the power-off based on the contents stored in the backup means. (Return operation in the case of NO in S111 and S113), and regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine before power-off stored in the backup means, the gaming state of the pachinko machine after power restoration to the game standby state A specific return operation (return operation in the case of YES in S113)
Whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and/or, the effect execution conditions are set so that the output output triggered by the touch detection may be different,
The conditions defined as the performance execution conditions, the game state of the pachinko machine after returning from the power off, whether the elapsed time in the game standby state by the timekeeping means has reached a predetermined time, And are included,
It is configured to set the clocking time of the clocking means to a predetermined value (20 seconds or the like) regardless of whether the recovery is the normal recovery operation or the specific recovery operation when the power is turned off. There is.
As a result, it is possible to more appropriately utilize the detection of the operation of the firing handle, and to appropriately control the execution of the touch effect even after the power is restored.
<Summary 8>

Another invention according to the present embodiment is to shoot a game ball into a game area, and the game ball enters a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the playing area. As a result, the symbols (special symbols, etc.) are variably displayed as a symbol game, and then stopped and displayed, and when the symbols that are stopped and displayed are in a predetermined display mode, a special game capable of giving a profit to the player is performed. Machine,
Main control means (main board or the like) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game,
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting the contact of the player,
And a rotation operation detecting means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting the rotation operation of the player,
The main control means,
It is possible to give a profit to the player according to the result of the game, and it is possible to make settings relating to giving a profit to the player (setting of the advantage degree of the player, etc.),
The state of the pachinko gaming machine, including a setting change state capable of performing the setting, and a normal state different from the setting change state,
In the setting change state, the output of the effect based on the detection by the touch detection unit is not performed regardless of the change state of the detection state of the touch detection unit and/or the detection state of the rotation operation detection unit. Has been done.
As a result, the touch effect can be limited to the setting operation while more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 9>

Another invention according to the present embodiment is to shoot a game ball into a game area, and the game ball enters a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the playing area. As a result, the symbols (special symbols, etc.) are variably displayed as a symbol game, and then stopped and displayed, and when the symbols that are stopped and displayed are in a predetermined display mode, a special game capable of giving a profit to the player is performed. Machine,
Main control means (main board or the like) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game,
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting the contact of the player,
And a rotation operation detecting means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting the rotation operation of the player,
The main control means is capable of launching a game ball with an intensity according to the amount of rotation detected by the rotation operation detecting means on condition that touch detection is detection of contact of the player by the touch detecting means,
Some of the effects are output upon the touch detection (touch effects, etc.),
The main control means,
After the pachinko gaming machine is powered on, the variable display of the symbol is displayed even when the game ball enters the starting winning port before the touch detection means detects the contact of the player. While performing, it is configured to transmit the transmission information corresponding to the variable display of the symbol to the sub control means.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the symbol game from being restricted by the presence or absence of the touch detection while more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle. <Other embodiments>

The present invention is not limited to the various embodiments described above, but can be modified in various ways. For example, the present invention is a pachinko game machine in which a game ball as a game medium acquired by the player is paid out directly to the player so that the player can touch the prize ball, as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to, for example, an enclosed circulation type pachinko game machine (management game machine) that circulates and uses a game ball inside the game machine. Further, the enclosed circulation type pachinko game machine can be exemplified by one capable of electromagnetically recording the entry and exit of the game medium.

Further, the present invention is provided with a plurality of reels in which a predetermined number of symbols are arranged, controls the start and stop of rotation of the reels based on the operation of the player, and plays games such as game medals in accordance with the winning winning combination. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine (spindle type gaming machine) for paying out a medium (including storing in a storage device). When the present invention is applied to the slot machine, instead of detecting the steering wheel operation, the detection of the operation of the bet button that can be operated by the player at the time of betting setting, or the detection of the bet button operation by the player at the time of betting setting can also be performed. Based on the detection of the insertion of the game medal, it is possible to apply the effect output according to the state of the game machine. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to, for example, a casino machine installed in a casino facility.

10 Pachinko game machine, 20 firing handle, 50 game board, 52 game area,
53 main control display device, 62 first start winning opening, 63 second starting winning opening,
70 1st special symbol display section, 71 2nd special symbol display section, 90 big winning device,
102 main board, 104 sub-board, 113 first hit/miss determining means,
117 second winning/discarding determination means, 120 special game control means, 301 sub main board,
302 sub-sub board, 310 touch sensor, 311 firing intensity volume 311,
501 main board CPU, 521 sub-main board CPU.

Claims (1)

The game ball fired in the game area, the game ball to the starting winning opening formed in the game area is stopped and displayed after triggered by the symbol games varied display the FIG pattern in that it has ball entrance and display stop symbols Is a pachinko game machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when is a predetermined display mode,
A main control means for controlling the progress of a game including the symbol game,
A sub-control unit that is communicatively connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information transmitted from the main control unit;
Production output means for producing a production under the control of the sub control means,
Touch detection means for detecting the contact of the player,
A rotation operation detecting means for detecting the rotation operation of the player,
An environment setting means that enables the player to set an environment for the game ,
Some of the effects are output upon the touch detection, which is the detection of the contact of the player by the touch detection means,
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is being executed, and a state in which one of the symbol game and the special game is being executed. Having a game running state,
The game standby state includes a plurality of types of game standby states in which the output contents of the effect by the sub-control means are different,
Depending on which one of the plurality of types of game standby states is in the game standby state, whether or not an effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and/or an output which is triggered by the touch detection. Are configured to be different,
As the starting winning opening, a first starting winning opening and a second starting winning opening are provided.
An opening/closing member is attached to the second starting winning opening,
The game area is provided with an operation port into which a game ball can enter,
The opening and closing member is driven by the fact that the game ball has entered the operation opening, so that the game ball can be easily inserted into the second starting winning opening.
In the situation where the power is restored while the touch detection means is being contacted before the power is turned on, the effect triggered by the touch detection is not output,
During the output of the effect triggered by the touch detection, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the effect triggered by the touch detection during output is interrupted, Even if a game ball enters the operating port, the effect triggered by the touch detection during output continues without interruption,
When a predetermined first error is detected during the output of the effect triggered by the touch detection, the effect triggered by the touch detection during output is interrupted, but a second error different from the first error occurs. Even if detected, the effect triggered by the touch detection during output is continued without interruption,
It is possible to set the environment after displaying the environment setting screen for performing the environment setting in the game standby state,
After a certain period of time has passed from the game execution state to the game standby state, it is possible to execute the effect triggered by the touch detection, while displaying the environment setting screen and performing the environment setting. The pachinko game machine is characterized by the fact that no effects are triggered by touch detection .